BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Chemokines are chemotactic cytokines that are released by a wide variety of cells to attract macrophages, T-cells, eosinophils, basophils, neutrophils and endothelial cells to sites of inflammation and tumor growth. There are two main classes of chemokines, the CXC-chemokines and the CC-chemokines. The class depends on whether the first two cysteines are separated by a single amino acid (CXC-chemokines) or are adjacent (CC-chemokines). The CXC-chemokines include, but are not limited to, interleukin-8 (IL-8), neutrophil-activating protein-1 (NAP-1), neutrophil-activating protein-2 (NAP-2), GROcc, GROß, GROy, ENA-78, GCP-2, IP-10, MIG and PF4. CC chemokines include, but are not limited to, RANTES, MIP-1a, MIP-2p, monocyte chemotactic protein-1 (MCP-1), MCP-2, MCP-3, CCL19, CCL21 and eotaxin. Individual members of the chemokine families are known to be bound by at least one chemokine receptor, with CXC-chemokines generally bound by members of the CXCR class of receptors, and CC-chemokines by members of the CCR class of receptors. For example, IL-8 is bound by the CXCR-1 and CXCR-2 receptors.

Since CXC-chemokines promote the accumulation and activation of neutrophils, these chemokines have been implicated in a wide range of acute and

chronic inflammatory disorders including psoriasis and rheumatoid arthritis. Baggiolini et al., FEBS Lett. 307,97 (1992); Miller et al., Crit. Rev. Immunol. 12,17 (1992); Oppenheim et al., Annu. Fev. Immunol. 9,617 (1991); Seitz et al., J. Clin. Invest. 87, 463 (1991); Miller et al., Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 146,427 (1992); Donnely et al., Lancet 341,643 (1993).

ELRCXC chemokines including IL-8, GROa, GROß, GROy, NAP-2, and ENA- 78 (Strieter et al. 1995 JBC 270 p. 27348-57) have also been implicated in the induction of tumor angiogenesis (new blood vessel growth). All of these chemokines are believed to exert their actions by binding to the 7 transmembrane G-protein coupled receptor CXCR2 (also known as IL-8RB), while IL-8 also binds CXCR1 (also known as IL-8RA). Thus, their angiogenic activity is due to their binding to and activation of CXCR2, and possible CXCR1 for IL-8, expressed on the surface of vascular endothelial cells (ECs) in surrounding vessels.

Many different types of tumors have been shown to produce ELRCXC chemokines and their production has been correlated with a more aggressive phenotype (Inoue et al. 2000 Clin Cancer Res 6 p. 2104-2119) and poor prognosis (Yoneda et. al. 1998 J Nat Cancer Inst 90 p. 447-454). Chemokines are potent chemotactic factors and the ELRCXC chemokines have been shown to induce EC chemotaxis. Thus, these chemokines probably induce chemotaxis of endothelial cells toward their site of production in the tumor. This may be a critical step in the induction of angiogenesis by the tumor. Inhibitors of CXCR2 or dual inhibitors of CXCR2 and CXCR1 will inhibit the angiogenic activity of the ELRCXC chemokines and therefore block the growth of the tumor. This anti-tumor activity has been demonstrated for antibodies to IL-8 (Arenberg et al. 1996 J Clin Invest 97 p. 2792-2802), ENA-78 (Arenberg et al. 1998 J Clin Invest 102 p. 465-72), and GROa (Haghnegahdar et al.

J. Leukoc Biology 2000 67 p. 53-62).

Many tumor cells have also been shown to express CXCR2 and thus tumor cells may also stimulate their own growth when they secrete ELRCXC chemokines.

Thus, along with decreasing angiogenesis, inhibitors of CXCR2 may directly inhibit the growth of tumor cells.

Hence, the CXC-chemokine receptors represent promising targets for the development of novel anti-inflammatory and anti-tumor agents.

There remains a need for compounds that are capable of modulating activity at CXC-chemokine receptors. For example, conditions associated with an increase in IL-8 production (which is responsible for chemotaxis of neutrophil and T-cell subsets into the inflammatory site and growth of tumors) would benefit by compounds that are inhibitors of IL-8 receptor binding.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION This invention provides novel compounds of formula IA: and the pharmaceutical acceptable salts (e. g. , sodium or calcium) thereof, wherein A, B, D and E are defined below.

This invention also provides a method of treating a chemokine mediated disease or condition in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one compound (usually 1) of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating a CXCR1 and/or CXCR2 mediated disease or condition in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one compound (usually 1) of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating a CCR7 mediated disease or condition in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one compound (usually 1) of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating cancer in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating Kaposi's sarcoma, melanoma, gastric carcinoma, and non-small cell carcinoma in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating melanoma, gastric carcinoma, and non-small cell carcinoma in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating cancer in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one anticancer agent selected from the group consisting of: (a) microtubule affecting agents, (b) antineoplastic agents, (c) anti-angiogenesis agents, or (d) VEGF receptor kinase inhibitors, (e) antibodies against the VEGF receptor, (f) interferon, and g) radiation. The compound of formula IA can be administered concurrently or sequentially with the anticancer agent.

This invention also provides a method of treating cancer in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one (usually 1) antineoplastic agent selected from the group consisting of: gemcitabine, paclitaxel (TaxolO), 5-Fluorourcil (5-FU), cyclophosphamide (Cytoxan0), temozolomide, and Vincristine.

This invention also provides a method of treating cancer in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, concurrently or sequentially with microtubule affecting agent, e. g., paclitaxel.

This invention also provides a method treating cancer in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of: (a) at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, concurrently or sequentially with (b) at least one (usually 1) agent selected from the group consisting of: (1) antineoplastic agents, (2) microtubule affecting agents, and (3) anti-angiogenesis agents.

This invention also provides a method of inhibiting angiogenesis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating angiogenic ocular disease (e. g., ocular inflammation, retinopathy of prematurity, diabetic retinopathy, macular degeneration with the wet type preferred and corneal neovascularization) in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating a chemokine mediated (e. g., CXCR1 and/or CXCR2, or CCR7) disease or condition selected from the group consisting of: pain (e. g. , acute pain, acute inflammatory pain, chronic inflammatory pain, and neuropathic pain), acute inflammation, chronic inflammation, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, atopic dermatitis, asthma, COPD, adult respiratory disease, arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, gram negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, stroke, ischemia reperfusion injury, renal reperfusion injury, glomerulonephritis, thrombosis, Alzheimer's disease, graft vs. host reaction (i. e. , graft vs. host disease), allograft rejections (e. g. , acute allograft rejection, and chronic allograft rejection), malaria, acute respiratory distress syndrome, delayed type hypersensitivity reaction, atherosclerosis, cerebral ischemia, cardiac ischemia, osteoarthritis, multiple sclerosis, restinosis, angiogenesis, osteoporosis, gingivitis, respiratory viruses, herpes viruses, hepatitis viruses, HIV, Kaposi's sarcoma associated virus (i. e. , Kaposi's sarcoma), meningitis, cystic fibrosis, pre-term labor, cough, pruritis, multi-organ dysfunction, trauma, strains, sprains, contusions, psoriatic arthritis, herpes, encephalitis, CNS vasculitis, traumatic brain injury, CNS tumors, subarachnoid hemorrhage, post surgical trauma, interstitial pneumonitis, hypersensitivity, crystal induced arthritis, acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, acute alcoholic hepatitis, necrotizing enterocolitis, chronic sinusitis, angiogenic ocular disease, ocular inflammation, retinopathy of prematurity, diabetic retinopathy, macular degeneration with the wet type preferred, corneal neovascula ! rization, polymyositis, vasculitis, acne, gastric ulcers, duodenal ulcers, celiac disease, esophagitis, glossitis, airflow obstruction, airway hyperresponsiveness (i. e. , airway hyperreactivity), bronchiectasis, bronchiolitis, bronchiolitis obliterans (i. e., bronchiolitis obliterans syndrome), chronic bronchitis, cor pulmonae, dyspnea, emphysema, hypercapnea, hyperinflation, hypoxemia, hyperoxia- induced inflammations, hypoxia, surgical lung volume reduction, pulmonary fibrosis,

pulmonary hypertension, right ventricular hypertrophy, peritonitis associated with continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis (CAPD), granulocytic ehrlichiosis, sarcoidosis, small airway disease, ventilation-perfusion mismatching, wheeze, colds, gout, alcoholic liver disease, lupus, burn therapy (i. e. , the treatment of burns), periodontitis, cancer, transplant reperfusion injury, early transplantation rejection (e. g., acute allograft rejection), airway hyperreactivity, allergic contact dermatitis, allergic rhinitis, alopecia areata, antiphospholipid syndromes, plastic anemia, autoimmune deafness (including, for example, Meniere's disease), autoimmune hemolytic syndromes, autoimmune hepatitis, autoimmune neuropathy, autoimmune ovarian failure, autoimmune orchitis, autoimmune thrombocytopenia, bullous pemphigoid, chronic allograft vasculopathy, chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy, cirrhosis, cor pneumoniae, cryoglobulinemia, dermatomyositis, diabetes, drug-induced autoimmunity, epidermolysis bullosa acquisita, endometriosis, fibrotic diseases, gastritis, Goodpasture's syndrome, Graves'disease, Gullain-Barre disease, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, hepatitis-associated autoimmunity, HIV-related autoimmune syndromes and hematologic disorders, hypophytis, idiopathic thrombocytic pupura, interstitial cystitis, juvenile arthritis, Langerhans'cell histiocytitis, lichen planus, metal- induced autoimmunity, myasthenia gravis, myelodysplastic syndromes, myocarditis (including viral myocarditis), myositis, Neuropathies (including, for example, IgA neuropathy, membranous neuropathy and idiopathic neuropathy), nephritic syndrome, optic neuritis, pancreatitis, paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobulinemia, pemphigus, polymyalgia, post-infectious autoimmunity, primary biliary cirrhosis, reactive arthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, Raynaud's phenomenon, Reiter's syndrome, reperfusion injury, scleritis, scleroderma, secondary hematologic manifestation of autoimmune diseases (such as, for example, anemias), silicone implant associated autoimmune disease, Sjogren's syndrome, systemic lupus erythematosus, thrombocytopenia, transverse myelitis, tubulointerstitial nephritis, uveitis, vasculitis syndromes (such as, for example, giant cell arteritis, Behcet's disease and Wegener's granulomatosis), and Vitiligo in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one compound (usually 1) of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating a CXCR1 and/or a CXCR2 mediated disease or condition selected from the group consisting of: pain (e. g. , acute

pain, acute inflammatory pain, chronic inflammatory pain, and neuropathic pain), acute inflammation, chronic inflammation, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, atopic dermatitis, asthma, COPD, adult respiratory disease, arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, gram negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, stroke, ischemia reperfusion injury, renal reperfusion injury, glomerulonephritis, thrombosis, Alzheimer's disease, graft vs. host reaction (i. e. , graft vs. host disease), allograft rejections (e. g. , acute allograft rejection, and chronic allograft rejection), malaria, acute respiratory distress syndrome, delayed type hypersensitivity reaction, atherosclerosis, cerebral ischemia, cardiac ischemia, osteoarthritis, multiple sclerosis, restinosis, angiogenesis, osteoporosis, gingivitis, respiratory viruses, herpes viruses, hepatitis viruses, HIV, Kaposi's sarcoma associated virus (i. e. , Kaposi's sarcoma), meningitis, cystic fibrosis, pre-term labor, cough, pruritis, multi-organ dysfunction, trauma, strains, sprains, contusions, psoriatic arthritis, herpes, encephalitis, CNS vasculitis, traumatic brain injury, CNS tumors, subarachnoid hemorrhage, post surgical trauma, interstitial pneumonitis, hypersensitivity, crystal induced arthritis, acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, acute alcoholic hepatitis, necrotizing enterocolitis, chronic sinusitis, angiogenic ocular disease, ocular inflammation, retinopathy of prematurity, diabetic retinopathy, macular degeneration with the wet type preferred, corneal neovascularization, polymyositis, vasculitis, acne, gastric ulcers, duodenal ulcers, celiac disease, esophagitis, glossitis, airflow obstruction, airway hyperresponsiveness (i. e. , airway hyperreactivity), bronchiectasis, bronchiolitis, bronchiolitis obliterans, chronic bronchitis, cor pulmonae, dyspnea, emphysema, hypercapnea, hyperinflation, hypoxemia, hyperoxia-induced inflammations, hypoxia, surgical lung volume reduction, pulmonary fibrosis, pulmonary hypertension, right ventricular hypertrophy, peritonitis associated with continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis (CAPD), granulocytic ehrlichiosis, sarcoidosis, small airway disease, ventilation-perfusion mismatching, wheeze, colds, gout, alcoholic liver disease, lupus, bum therapy (i. e. , the treatment of burns), periodontitis, cancer, transplant reperfusion injury, early transplantation rejection (e. g. , acute allograft rejection) in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one compound (usually 1) of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating a CCR7 mediated disease or condition selected from the group consisting of: pain (e. g. , acute pain, acute inflammatory pain, chronic inflammatory pain, and neuropathic pain), acute inflammation, chronic inflammation, acute allograft rejection, acute respiratory distress syndrome, adult respiratory disease, airway hyperreactivity, allergic contact dermatitis, allergic rhinitis, alopecia areata, alzheimer's disease, angiogenic ocular disease, antiphospholipid syndromes, plastic anemia, asthma, atherosclerosis, atopic dermatitis, autoimmune deafness (including, for example, Meniere's disease), autoimmune hemolytic syndromes, autoimmune hepatitis, autoimmune neuropathy, autoimmune ovarian failure, autoimmune orchitis, autoimmune thrombocytopenia, bronchiolitis, bronchiolitis obliterans syndrome, bullous pemphigoid, burn therapy (i. e., the treatment of burns), cancer, cerebral ischemia, cardiac ischemia, chronic allograft rejection, chronic allograft vasculopathy, chronic bronchitis, chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy, chronic sinusitis, cirrhosis, CNS vasculitis, COPD, Cor pneumoniae, Crohn's disease, cryoglobulinemia, crystal-induced arthritis, delayed- type hypersensitivity reactions, dermatomyositis, diabetes, diabetic retinopathy, drug- induced autoimmunity, dyspnea, emphysema, epidermolysis bullosa acquisita, endometriosis, fibrotic diseases, gastritis, glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture's syndrome, graft vs host disease, Graves'disease, Gullain-Barre disease, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, hepatitis-associated autoimmunity, HIV-related autoimmune syndromes and hematologic disorders, hyperoxia-induced inflammation, hypercapnea, hyperinflation, hypophytis, hypoxia, idiopathic thrombocytic pupura, inflammatory bowel diseases, interstitial cystitis, interstitial pneumonitis, juvenile arthritis, Langerhans'cell histiocytitis, lichen planus, metal-induced autoimmunity, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, myelodysplastic syndromes, myocarditis including viral myocarditis, myositis, neuropathies (including, for example, IgA neuropathy, membranous neuropathy and idiopathic neuropathy), nephritic syndrome, ocular inflammation, optic neuritis, osteoarthritis, pancreatitis, paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobulinemia, pemphigus, polymyalgia, polymyositis, post-infectious autoimmunity, pulmonary fibrosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, psoriasis, pruritis, rheumatoid arthritis, reactive arthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, psoriatic arthritis, Raynaud's phenomenon, Reiter's syndrome, reperfusion injury, restenosis, sarcoidosis, scleritis, scleroderma, secondary hematologic manifestation of

autoimmune diseases (such as, for example, anemias), silicone implant associated autoimmune disease, Sjogren's syndrome, systemic lupus erythematosus, thrombocytopenia, thrombosis, transverse myelitis, tubulointerstitial nephritis, ulcerative colitis, uveitis, vasculitis and vasculitis syndromes (such as, for example, giant cell arteritis, Behcet's disease and Wegener's granulomatosis), and vitiligo in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one compound (usually 1) of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating a chemokine (e. g. , a CXC, or a CC chemokine) mediated disease or condition in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one (usually 1) other medicament (e. g. , a drug, agent or therapeutic) useful for the treatment of chemokine mediated diseases.

This invention also provides a method of treating a chemokine mediated disease or condition in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one (usually 1) other medicament (e. g. , a drug, agent or therapeutic) selected from the group consisting of: a) disease modifying antirheumatic drugs; b) nonsteroidal anitinflammatory drugs; c) COX-2 selective inhibitors; d) COX-1 inhibitors; e) immunosuppressives; f) steroids; g) biological response modifiers; and h) other anti-inflammatory agents or therapeutics useful for the treatment of chemokine mediated diseases.

This invention also provides a method of treating a pulmonary disease (e. g., COPD, asthma or cystic fibrosis) in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound (usually 1) of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one (usually 1) compound selected from the group

consisting of: glucocorticoids, 5-lipoxygenase inhibitors, 3-2 adrenoceptor agonists, muscarinic M1 antagonists, muscarinic M3 antagonists, muscarinic M2 agonists, NK3 antagonists, LTB4 antagonists, cysteinyl leukotriene antagonists, bronchodilators, PDE4 inhibitors, PDE inhibitors, elastase inhibitors, MMP inhibitors, phospholipase A2 inhibitors, phospholipase D inhibitors, histamine H1 antagonists, histamine H3 antagonists, dopamine agonists, adenosine A2 agonists, NK1 and NK2 antagonists, GABA-b agonists, nociceptin agonists, expectorants, mucolytic agents, decongestants, antioxidants, anti-IL-8 anti-bodies, anti-IL-5 antibodies, anti-IgE antibodies, anti-TNF antibodies, IL-10, adhesion molecule inhibitors, and growth hormones.

This invention also provides a method of treating multiple sclerosis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient, a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one compound selected from the group consisting of glatiramer acetate, glucocorticoids, methotrexate, azothioprine, mitoxantrone, chemokine inhibitors, and CB2-selective agents.

This invention also provides a method of treating multiple sclerosis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one compound selected from the group consisting of: methotrexate, cyclosporin, leflunimide, sulfasalazine, ß-methasone, p-interferon, glatiramer acetate, and prednisone.

This invention also provides a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one compound selected from the group consisting of COX-2 inhibitors, COX inhibitors, immunosuppressives (e. g. , methotrexate, cyclosporin, leflunimide and sulfasalazine),

steroids (e. g. , betamethasone, cortisone and dexamethasone), PDE IV inhibitors, anti- TNF-a compounds, MMP inhibitors, glucocorticoids, chemokine inhibitors, CB2- selective inhibitors, and other classes of compounds indicated for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.

This invention also provides a method of treating stroke and cardiac reperfusion injury in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one compound (usually 1) of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one compound selected from the group consisting of thrombolitics (e. g., tenecteplase, TPA, alteplase), antiplatelet agents (e. g., gpllb/Illa), antagonists (e. g. , abciximab and eftiifbatide), anticoagulants (e. g., heparin), and other compounds indicated for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.

This invention also provides a method of treating stroke and cardiac reperfusion injury in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one compound selected from the group consisting of tenecteplase, TPA, alteplase, abciximab, eftiifbatide, and heparin.

This invention also provides a method of treating psoriasis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a thereapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in combination with at least one compound selected from the group consisting of immunosuppressives (e. g. , methotrexate, cyclosporin, leflunimide and sulfasalazine), steroids (e. g., ß-methasone) and anti-TNF-a compounds (e. g., etonercept and infliximab).

This invention also provides a method of treating COPD in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating arthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating osteoarthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof, and administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one medicament selected from the group consisting of: NSAIDs, COXIB inhibitors, anti-depressants, and anti-convulsants.

This invention also provides a method of treating acute pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating acute inflammatory pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating chronic inflammatory pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a method of treating neropathic pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

This invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one (e. g. , 1-3, usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

This invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one (e. g. , 1-3, usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof, and at least one (e. g. , 1-3, usually 1) other agent, medicament, antibody and/or inhibitor disclosed above, and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION When any variable occurs more than one time in any moiety, its definition on each occurrence is independent of its definition at every other occurrence. Also, combinations of substituents and/or variables are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds.

Unless indicated otherwise, the following definitions apply throughout the present specification and claims. These definitions apply regardless of whether a term is used by itself or in combination with other terms. For example, the definition of "alkyl"also applies to the"alkyl"portion of"alkoxy".

"An effective amount"means a therapeutically acceptable amount (i. e. , that amount which provides the desired therapeutic effective).

"At least one"means one or more (e. g. , 1-3,1-2, or 1).

"Bu"represents butyl.

"Bn"represents benzyl.

"Composition"includes a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product that results, directly or indirectly, from combination of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts.

"Et"represents ethyl.

"In combination with"as used to describe the administration of a compound of formula IA with other medicaments in the methods of treatment of this invention, means that the compounds of formula IA and the other medicaments are administered sequentially or concurrently in separate dosage forms, or are administered concurrently in the same dosage form.

"Mammal"includes a human being, and preferably means a human being.

"Patient"includes both human and other mammals, preferably human.

"Ph", as used in the structures herein, represents phenyl.

"Pr"represents propyl.

"Prodrug"represents compounds that are rapidly transformed in vivo to the parent compound of the above formula, for example, by hydrolysis in blood. A thorough discussion is provided in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14 of the A. C. S. Symposium Series, and in Edward B. Roche, ed. , Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, both of which are incorporated herein by reference.

"Alkyl"means a straight or branched saturated hydrocarbon chain having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.

"Alkoxy"means an alkyl-O-group wherein alkyl is as defined above. Non- limiting examples of alkoxy groups include: methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy and n-butoxy. The bond to the parent moiety is through the ether oxygen.

"Alkenyl"means a straight or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group having at least one carbon-carbon double bond, and 2 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms. Non-limiting examples of alkenyl groups include : ethenyl, propenyl, n-butenyl, 3-methylbut-2-enyl, n-pentenyl, octenyl and decenyl.

"Alkynyl"means a straight or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, and 2 to 15 carbon atoms, preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms. Non-limiting examples of alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-methylbutynyl, n-pentynyl, and decynyl.

"Aryl"means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system, wherein at least one ring is aromatic, comprising about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, and preferably about 6 to about 10 carbon atoms. Non-limiting examples of suitable aryl groups include : phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indanyl, anthracenyl, and fluorenyl.

"Arylalkyl"means an aryl group, as defined above, bound to an alkyl group, as defined above, wherein the alkyl group is bound to the parent moiety. Non-limiting examples of suitable arylalkyl groups include benzyl, phenethyl and naphthleneylmethyl.

"Bn"represents benzyl.

"Cycloalkyl"means saturated carbocyclic rings having 3 to 10 (e. g. , 3 to 7) carbon atoms, preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 5 to 7 carbon atoms, and having one to three rings. Non-limiting examples of cycloalkyl groups include : cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, norbornyl, and adamantyl.

"Cycloalkylalkyl"means a cycloalkyl group bound to the parent moiety through an alkyl group. Non-limiting examples include : cyclopropylmethyl and cyclohexylmethyl.

"Cycloalkenyl"means a non-aromatic mono or multicyclic ring system comprising 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms, and having at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Preferred cycloalkenyl rings have 5 to 7 carbon atoms. Non-limiting examples of cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyl, and norbornenyl.

"Et"represents ethyl.

"Halo"means fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo groups. Preferred are fluoro, chloro or bromo, and more preferred are fluoro and chloro.

"Halogen"means fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine. Preferred are fluorine, chlorine or bromine, and more preferred are fluorine and chlorine.

"Haloalkyl"means an alkyl group as defined above wherein one or more hydrogen atoms on the alkyl is replaced by a halo group defined above.

"Heterocyclyl"or"heterocyclic"or"heterocycloalkyl"means a non-aromatic saturated monocyclic or multicyclic ring system (i. e. , a saturated carbocyclic ring or ring system) comprising 3 to 10 ring atoms (e. g. , 3 to 7 ring atoms), preferably 5 to 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the atoms in the ring system is an element other than carbon, for example nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, alone or in combination. There are no adjacent oxygen and/or sulfur atoms present in the ring system. Preferred heterocyclyls have 5 to 6 ring atoms. The prefix aza, oxa or thia before the heterocyclyl root name means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom, respectively, is present as a ring atom. The nitrogen or sulfur atom of the heterocyclyl can be optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide, S-oxide or S, S-dioxide. Non- limiting examples of monocyclic heterocyclyl rings include : piperidyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, 1, 3-dioxolanyl, 1, 4-dioxanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, and tetrahydrothiopyranyl.

The term heterocyclic acidic functional group is intended to include groups such as, pyrrole, imidazole, triazole, tetrazol, and the like.

"Heteroaryl"means an aromatic monocyclic or multicyclic ring system comprising 5 to 14 ring atoms, preferably 5 to 10 ring atoms, in which one or more of the ring atoms is an element other than carbon, for example nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, alone or in combination. Preferred heteroaryis contain 5 to 6 ring atoms. The prefix aza, oxa or thia before the heteroaryl root name means that at least a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom respectively, is present as a ring atom. A nitrogen atom of a heteroaryl can be optionally oxidized to the corresponding N-oxide. Non-limiting examples of heteroaryis include : pyridyl, pyrazinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrimidinyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, furazanyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, 1,2, 4-thiadiazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, imidazo [1,2-a] pyridinyl, imidazo [2, 1-b] thiazolyl, benzofurazanyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzothienyl, quinolinyl, imidazolyl, thienopyridyl, quinazolinyl, thienopyrimidyl, pyrrolopyridyl, imidazopyridyl, isoquinolinyl, benzoazaindolyl, 1,2, 4- triazinyl, and benzothiazolyl.

"Heteroarylalkyl"means a heteroaryl group, as defined above, bound to an alkyl group, as defined above, where the bond to the parent moiety is through the alkyl group.

"Solvate"means a physical association of a compound of this invention with one or more solvent molecules ; This physical association involves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding; In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid ;"Solvate"encompasses both solution-phase and isolatable solvates ; Non-limiting examples of suitable solvates include ethanolates, methanolates, and the like ; "Hydrate"is a solvate wherein the solvent molecule is H20.

The term"pharmaceutical composition"is also intended to encompass both the bulk composition and individual dosage units comprised of more than one (e. g. , two) pharmaceutically active agents such as, for example, a compound of the present invention and an additional agent selected from the lists of the additional agents described herein, along with any pharmaceutical inactive excipients. The bulk composition and each individual dosage unit can contain fixed amounts of the afore-

said"more than one pharmaceutically active agents". The bulk composition is material that has not yet been formed into individual dosage units. An illustrative dosage unit is an oral dosage unit such as tablets, pills and the like. Similarly, the herein-described method of treating a patient by administering a pharmaceutical composition of the present invention is also intended to encompass the administration of the afore-said bulk composition and individual dosage units.

N-oxides can form on a tertiary nitrogen present in an R substituent, or on =N- in a heteroaryl ring substituent and are included in the compounds of formula IA.

As well known in the art, a bond drawn from a particular atom wherein no moiety is depicted at the terminal end of the bond indicates a methyl group bound through that bond to the atom. For example:

cl3 represents 3 0 OH O OH Br Br represents H3C OH N OH O H3C O 0'"0 represents OH N OH' O H3C O 0"sC o v H3CCH3 ?, O O o represents CH3 CHs CH3 / O , O represents ans and CH3 H3C CH3 [' HsC-CHs H3Cj, _CH3 represents CH3 H3C The compounds of this invention are represented by formula IA:

and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts (e. g. , sodium or calcium salt) thereof, wherein: D and E are independently selected from the group consisting of: N and CR provided that D and E are not the same; R50 is selected from the group consisting of: H, -C (O) R13, -C(O)OR13, -C(O)NR13R14, -S(O)2NR13R14, -CF3, -CN, -NO2, -NR13R14, R13 and halo (e. g., Cl and Br), and R50 is preferably H; A is selected from the group consisting of: (1)

wherein the above rings of said A groups are substituted with 1 to 6 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of : R9 groups; (3)

wherein one or both of the above rings of said A groups are substituted with 1 to 6 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups;

wherein the above phenyl rings of said A groups are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents each independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; and

B is selected from the group consisting of

n is 0 to 6 ; p is 1 to 5 ; XisO, NR13, orS ; Z is 1 to 3 ; R2 is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, OH,-C (O) OH, -SH, - R,-NHC (O) R,-NHS02NR R,-NHS02R,-NR13R,-C (O) NR' R -C(O)NHOR13, -C(O)NR13OH, - S (02) OH,-OC (O) R13, an unsubstituted heterocyclic acidic functional group, and a substituted heterocyclic acidic functional group; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted heterocyclic acidic functional group each substituent being independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; each R3 and R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, cyano, halogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl substituted with 1 to 4 alkyl groups (preferably Ci to C6 alkyl groups) wherein each alkyl group is independently selected, unsubstituted cycloalkyl, alkoxy,-OH,-CF3,-OCF3,-N02,-C (O) R,-C (O) OR -C(O)NHR17, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO(t)NR13R14, -SO(t)R13, -C(O)NR13OR14, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted aryl group and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; and wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted heteroaryl group and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; or R3 is and R4 taken together with the carbons atoms to which they are bonded to in the the phenyl B substituent form a fused ring of the formula: (preferably Z1) wherein Z1 or z2 iS an unsubstituted or substituted saturated heterocyclic ring (preferably a 4 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring), said ring Z'or Z2 optionally containing one additional heteroatom selected from the group consisting of: O, S and NR18 ; wherein there are 1 to 3 substituents on said ring Z'or Z2, and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C (O) OR,-C (O) NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -So2R15 provided that R15 is not H,-NHC (O) NR15R16, -NHC(O)OR15, halogen, and a heterocycloalkenyl group (i. e. , a heterocyclic group that has at least one, and preferably one, double bond in a ring, e. g., examples of the fused ring moiety include, but are not limited to: each R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy,-CF3,-OCF3, -NO2-C -C(O)R13, -C(O)OR13, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO(t)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, cyano, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl group;

wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted aryl group and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; and wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted heteroaryl group and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; each R7 and R3 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, -CO2R13, -CONR13R14, alkynyl, alkenyl, and cycloalkenyl ; and wherein there are one or more (e. g. , 1 to 6) substituents on said substituted R7 and R8 groups, wherein each substitutent is independently selected from the group consisting of: a) halogen, b)-CF3, c)-COR d) -OR13, e) -NR13R14, f)-N02, g)-CN, h)-S020R i) -Si (alkyl) 3, wherein each alkyl is independently selected, j) -Si (aryl) 3, wherein each alkyl is independently selected, k)-(R13) 2R14Si, wherein each R13 is independently selected, <BR> <BR> I)-Co2R13.<BR> <BR> m) -C (O) NR13R14, n) -SO2NR13R14, o) -SO2R13, p)-OC (O) R q) -OC (O) NR13R14, r)-NR13C (o) R14, and s) -NR13CO2R14 ; (fluoroalkyl is one non-limiting example of an alkyl group that is substituted with halogen) ;

R3a is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl and cycloalkylalkyl ; each R9 is independently selected from the group consisting of: <BR> <BR> <BR> a)-R13,<BR> @ b) halogen, c)-CF3, d)-COR e) -OR13, <BR> <BR> <BR> f)-NR13R14<BR> <BR> <BR> <BR> <BR> g)-N02, h)-CN, i) -SO2R13, <BR> <BR> <BR> j)-S02NR R<BR> <BR> <BR> <BR> k)-NR13CoR14<BR> <BR> <BR> <BR> <BR> -CONR R m) -NR13CO2R14, n) -CO2R13, o) p) alkyl substituted with one or more (e. g. , one) -OH groups (e. g., -(CH2) qOH, wherein q is 1-6, usually 1 to 2, and preferably 1), q) alkyl substituted with one or more (e. g., one) -NR13R14 group (e. g., -(CH2)qNR13R14, wherein q is 1-6, usually 1 to 2, and preferably 1), and r) -N(R13)SO2R14 (e.g., R13 is H and R14 is alkyl, such as methyl) ; each R10 and R11 is independently selected from the group consisting of R13, (e. g. , hydrogen and alkyl (e. g., Ci to C6 alkyl, such as methyl)), halogen,-CF3,-OCF3, -NR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -OH, -C(O)OR13, -SH -SO(t)NR13R14, -SO2R13, - NHC (O) R13, -NHSO2NR13R14, -NHSO2R13, -C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, -OC(O)R13 and cyano; is selected from the group consisting of: hydrogen, -C (O) OR unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted

or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl group; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on the substituted R12 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: R9 groups; each R13 and R14 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cyanoalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cyanocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocyclic, unsubstituted or substituted fluoroalkyl, and unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkylalkyl (wherein "heterocyloalkyl"means heterocyclic) ; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted R13 and R14 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl,-CF3,-OH, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, fluroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,-N (R4°) 2,-C (O) OR15, -C (O) NR15R16, -S(O)tNR15R16, -C(O)R15, halogen, -NHC(O)NR15R16, and -SO2R15 provided that R15 is not H; and provided that for the substituted cyanoalkyl and the substituted cyanocycloalkyl moieties the carbon atom to which the cyano (CN) group is bound to does not also have bound to said carbon atom a substituent selected from the group consisting of:-OH, alkoxy,-N (R40) 2, halogen and-NHC (O) NR15R16 ; or R13 and R14 taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups -C(O)NR13R14 and -SO2NR13R14 form an unsubstituted or substituted saturated heterocyclic ring (preferably a 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring), said ring optionally containing one additional heteroatom selected from the group consisting of: O, S and NR18 ; wherein there are 1 to 3 substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups (i. e. , there is 1 to 3 substituents on the ring formed when the R13 and R14 groups are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are bound) and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: CN, alkyl, cyanoalkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cyanocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15 (provided that R is not <BR> <BR> <BR> H), -NHC (O) NRR,-NHC (0) OR, hatogen, and a heterocycloalkenyl group (i. e. , a heterocyclic group that has at least one, and preferably one, double bond in a ring, e. g.,

and provided that the carbon atom to which the cyano (CN) group is bound to does not also have bound to said carbon atom a substituent selected from the group consisting of: hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, halogen,-NHC (O) NR15R16 and-NHC (O) oR15 ; (or in another embodiment, (1) each R13 and R14 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocyclic, unsubstituted or substituted fluoroalkyl, and unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkylalkyl (wherein"heterocyloalkyl"means heterocyclic) ; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted R13 and R14 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl,-CF3,-OH, alkoxy, aryl, arylalkyl, fluroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl,-N (R4°) 2, -C(O)OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -S(O)tNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15 provided that R is not H, halogen, and-NHC (O) NR15R16 ; or (2) R13 and R14 taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups-C (O) NR13R14 and -SO2NR13R14 form an unsubstituted or substituted saturated heterocyclic ring (preferably a 3 to 7 membered heterocyclic ring), said ring optionally containing one additional heteroatom selected from the group consisting of: O, S and Nu 18 ; wherein there are 1 to 3 substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups (i. e. , there is 1 to 3 substituents on the ring formed when the R13 and R14 groups are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are bound) and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C (O) OR -C(O)NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15 (provided that R is not H), -NHC(O)NR15R16, -NHC(O)OR15, halogen, and a heterocycloalkenyl group (i. e. , a heterocyclic group that has at least one, and preferably one, double bond in a ring, e. g.,

each R15 and R16 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl ; R17 is selected from the group consisting of : -SO2alkyl, -SO2aryl, -SO2cycloalkyl, and -SO2heteroaryl ; R18 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,-C (O) R19, -SO2R19 and-C (O) NR19R20 ; each R19 and R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl ; R30 is selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, cycloalkyl,-CN,-N02, or -So2R15 provided that R15 is not H; each R31 is independently selected from the group consisting of: unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl and unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl ; wherein there are 1 to 6 substituents on said substituted R31 groups and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, halogen and-CF3 ; each R40 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl and cycloalkyl ; and tis0, 1 or 2.

Compounds of formula IA include compounds of formula IA. 1 : wherein A, B, and R50 are as described for compounds of formula IA.

Compounds of formula IA also include compounds of formula IA. 2:

wherein A, B, and R50 are as described for compounds of formula IA.

The descriptions of the compounds of formula IA below apply equally as well to the compounds of formula IA. 1 unless otherwise indicated.

The descriptions of the compounds of formula IA below also apply equally as well to the compounds of formula IA. 2 unless otherwise indicated.

For compounds of formula IA, when R3 is -SO(t)NR13R14 (e.g., -SO2NR13R14), preferably R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of: H and alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl). Examples include, but are not limited to (1)-S02NH2 and (2) -SO2NR13R14 wherein R13 and R14 are the same or different alkyl group (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), e. g. , the same alkyl group, such as, for example-S02N (CH3) 2.

For compounds of formula IA, when R3 is-C (O) NR R, preferably R and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of: H and alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl). Examples include, but are not limited to-C (O) NR13R14 wherein each R13 and R14 are the same or different alkyl group, e. g. , the same alkyl group, such as, for example-C (O) N (CH3) z.

For the compounds of formula IA substituent A is preferably selected from the group consisting of: (1) unsubstituted or substituted :

wherein all substitutents are as defined for formula IA.

For the compounds of formula IA substituent A is most preferably : wherein the furan ring is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 alkyl groups (e. g., Ci to C3 alkyl groups) wherein each alkyl group is independently selected, R7 is selected from the group consisting of :-CF3, alkyl (e. g., Cl to C4 alkyl) and cycloalkyl (e. g., cyclopropyl), and R8 is H. More preferably the furan ring is substituted.

For the compounds of formula IA substituent A is even more preferably: wherein the furan ring is unsubstituted or substituted with 1 or 2 alkyl groups independently selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl and isoprpyl, R7 is selected from the group consisting of :-CF3, ethyl, isopropyl, t-butyl and cyclopropyl, and R8 is H. Still more preferably the furan ring is substituted.

For the compounds of formula IA substituent A is even yet more preferably: wherein the furan ring is substituted with 1 or 2 alkyl groups independently selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl and isopropyl, R is selected from the group consisting of: ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl, and R8 is H.

Examples of substituent A in formula IA include, but are not limited to:

Substituent A in formula IA is most preferably selected from the group consisting of:

Substituent A in formula IA is more preferably selected from the group consisting of:

Substituent A in formula IA is even more preferably selected from the group consisting of: Substituent B in formula IA is preferably selected from the group consisting of:

wherein all substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Substituent B in formula IA is most preferably selected from the group consisting of: Substituent B in Formula IA is more preferably selected from the group consisting of:

Substituent B in Formula IA is even more preferably selected from the group consisting of:

Substituent B in Formula IA is still even more preferably selected from the group consisting of:

An embodiment of the present invention is directed to a method of treating an chemokine mediated disease or condition in a patient in need of such treatment (e. g., a mammal, preferably a human being) comprising administering to said patient a

therapeutically effective amount of at least one (e. g. , 1-3, and usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Examples of chemokine mediated (e. g. , CXCR1 and/or CXCR2, or CCR7) diseases or conditions include but are not limited to: pain (e. g. , acute pain, acute inflammatory pain, chronic inflammatory pain, and neuropathic pain), rheumatoid arthritis, acute inflammatory pain, chronic inflammatory pain, psoriasis, atopic dermatitis, asthma, COPD, adult respiratory disease, arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, gram negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, stroke, ischemia reperfusion injury, renal reperfusion injury, glomerulonephritis, thrombosis, Alzheimer's disease, graft vs. host reaction (i. e. , graft vs. host disease), allograft rejections (e. g. , acute allograft rejection, and chronic allograft rejection), malaria, acute respiratory distress syndrome, delayed type hypersensitivity reaction, atherosclerosis, cerebral ischemia, cardiac ischemia, osteoarthritis, multiple sclerosis, restinosis, angiogenesis, osteoporosis, gingivitis, respiratory viruses, herpes viruses, hepatitis viruses, HIV, Kaposi's sarcoma associated virus (i. e. , Kaposi's sarcoma), meningitis, cystic fibrosis, pre-term labor, cough, pruritis, multi-organ dysfunction, trauma, strains, sprains, contusions, psoriatic arthritis, herpes, encephalitis, CNS vasculitis, traumatic brain injury, CNS tumors, subarachnoid hemorrhage, post surgical trauma, interstitial pneumonitis, hypersensitivity, crystal induced arthritis, acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, acute alcoholic hepatitis, necrotizing enterocolitis, chronic sinusitis, angiogenic ocular disease, ocular inflammation, retinopathy of prematurity, diabetic retinopathy, macular degeneration with the wet type preferred, corneal neovascularization, polymyositis, vasculitis, acne, gastric ulcers, duodenal ulcers, celiac disease, esophagitis, glossitis, airflow obstruction, airway hyperresponsiveness (i. e. , airway hyperreactivity), bronchiectasis, bronchiolitis, bronchiolitis obliterans, chronic bronchitis, cor pulmonae, dyspnea, emphysema, hypercapnea, hyperinflation, hypoxemia, hyperoxia-induced inflammations, hypoxia, surgical lung volume reduction, putmonary fibrosis, pulmonary hypertension, right ventricular hypertrophy, peritonitis associated with continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis (CAPD), granulocytic ehrlichiosis, sarcoidosis, small airway disease, ventilation-perfusion mismatching, wheeze, colds, gout, alcoholic liver disease, lupus, burn therapy (i. e. , the treatment of burns), periodontitis, cancer, transplant reperfusion injury, early transplantation rejection (e. g. , acute allograft

rejection), airway hyperreactivity, allergic contact dermatitis, allergic rhinitis, alopecia areata, antiphospholipid syndromes, plastic anemia, autoimmune deafness (including, for example, Meniere's disease), autoimmune hemolytic syndromes, autoimmune hepatitis, autoimmune neuropathy, autoimmune ovarian failure, autoimmune orchitis, autoimmune thrombocytopenia, bullous pemphigoid, chronic allograft vasculopathy, chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy, cirrhosis, cor pneumoniae, cryoglobulinemia, dermatomyositis, diabetes, drug-induced autoimmunity, epidermolysis bullosa acquisita, endometriosis, fibrotic diseases, gastritis, Goodpasture's syndrome, Graves'disease, Gullain-Barre disease, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, hepatitis-associated autoimmunity, HIV-related autoimmune syndromes and hematologic disorders, hypophytis, idiopathic thrombocytic pupura, interstitial cystitis, juvenile arthritis, Langerhans'cell histiocytitis, lichen planus, metal- induced autoimmunity, myasthenia gravis, myelodysplastic syndromes, myocarditis (including viral myocarditis), myositis, Neuropathies (including, for example, IgA neuropathy, membranous neuropathy and idiopathic neuropathy), nephritic syndrome, optic neuritis, pancreatitis, paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobulinemia, pemphigus, polymyalgia, post-infectious autoimmunity, primary biliary cirrhosis, reactive arthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, Raynaud's phenomenon, Reiter's syndrome, reperfusion injury, scleritis, scleroderma, secondary hematologic manifestation of autoimmune diseases (such as, for example, anemias), silicone implant associated autoimmune disease, Sjogren's syndrome, systemic lupus erythematosus, thrombocytopenia, transverse myelitis, tubulointerstitial nephritis, uveitis, vasculitis syndromes (such as, for example, giant cell arteritis, Behcet's disease and Wegener's granulomatosis), and Vitiligo.

Examples of CXCR1 and/or CXCR2 mediated diseases or conditions include but are not limited to: pain (e. g. , acute pain, acute inflammatory pain, chronic inflammatory pain, and neuropathic pain), acute inflammation, chronic inflammation, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, atopic dermatitis, asthma, COPD, adult respiratory disease, arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, gram negative sepsis, toxic shock syndrome, stroke, ischemia reperfusion injury, renal reperfusion injury, glomerulonephritis, thrombosis, Alzheimer's disease, graft vs. host reaction (i. e. , graft vs. host disease), allograft rejections (e. g. , acute allograft rejection, and chronic allograft rejection), malaria, acute respiratory distress syndrome, delayed type hypersensitivity reaction,

atherosclerosis, cerebral ischemia, cardiac ischemia, osteoarthritis, multiple sclerosis, restinosis, angiogenesis, osteoporosis, gingivitis, respiratory viruses, herpes viruses, hepatitis viruses, HIV, Kaposi's sarcoma associated virus (i. e. , Kaposi's sarcoma), meningitis, cystic fibrosis, pre-term labor, cough, pruritis, multi-organ dysfunction, trauma, strains, sprains, contusions, psoriatic arthritis, herpes, encephalitis, CNS vasculitis, traumatic brain injury, CNS tumors, subarachnoid hemorrhage, post surgical trauma, interstitial pneumonitis, hypersensitivity, crystal induced arthritis, acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, acute alcoholic hepatitis, necrotizing enterocolitis, chronic sinusitis, angiogenic ocular disease, ocular inflammation, retinopathy of prematurity, diabetic retinopathy, macular degeneration with the wet type preferred, corneal neovascularization, polymyositis, vasculitis, acne, gastric ulcers, duodenal ulcers, celiac disease, esophagitis, glossitis, airflow obstruction, airway hyperresponsiveness (i. e. , airway hyperreactivity), bronchiectasis, bronchiolitis, bronchiolitis obliterans, chronic bronchitis, cor pulmonae, dyspnea, emphysema, hypercapnea, hyperinflation, hypoxemia, hyperoxia-induced inflammations, hypoxia, surgical lung volume reduction, pulmonary fibrosis, pulmonary hypertension, right ventricular hypertrophy, peritonitis associated with continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis (CAPD), granulocytic ehrlichiosis, sarcoidosis, small airway disease, ventilation-perfusion mismatching, wheeze, colds, gout, alcoholic liver disease, lupus, burn therapy (i. e. , the treatment of burns), periodontitis, cancer, transplant reperfusion injury, early transplantation rejection (e. g. , acute allograft rejection).

Examples of CCR7 mediated diseases or conditions include, but are not limited to: pain (e. g. , acute pain, acute inflammatory pain, chronic inflammatory pain, and neuropathic pain), acute inflammation, chronic inflammation, acute allograft rejection, acute respiratory distress syndrome, adult respiratory disease, airway hyperreactivity, allergic contact dermatitis, allergic rhinitis, alopecia areata, alzheimer's disease, angiogenic ocular disease, antiphospholipid syndromes, plastic anemia, asthma, atherosclerosis, atopic dermatitis, autoimmune deafness (including, for example, Meniere's disease), autoimmune hemolytic syndromes, autoimmune hepatitis, autoimmune neuropathy, autoimmune ovarian failure, autoimmune orchitis, autoimmune thrombocytopenia, bronchiolitis, bronchiolitis obliterans syndrome, bullous pemphigoid, burn therapy (i. e. , the treatment of burns), cancer, cerebral ischemia, cardiac ischemia, chronic allograft rejection, chronic allograft vasculopathy,

chronic bronchitis, chronic inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy, chronic sinusitis, cirrhosis, CNS vasculitis, COPD, Cor pneumoniae, Crohn's disease, cryoglobulinemia, crystal-induced arthritis, delayed-type hypersensitivity reactions, dermatomyositis, diabetes, diabetic retinopathy, drug-induced autoimmunity, dyspnea, emphysema, epidermolysis bullosa acquisita, endometriosis, fibrotic diseases, gastritis, glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture's syndrome, graft vs host disease, Graves' disease, Gullain-Barre disease, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, hepatitis-associated autoimmunity, HIV-related autoimmune syndromes and hematologic disorders, hyperoxia-induced inflammation, hypercapnea, hyperinflation, hypophytis, hypoxia, idiopathic thrombocytic pupura, inflammatory bowel diseases, interstitial cystitis, interstitial pneumonitis, juvenile arthritis, Langerhans'cell histiocytitis, lichen planus, metal-induced autoimmunity, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, myelodysplastic syndromes, myocarditis including viral myocarditis, myositis, neuropathies (including, for example, IgA neuropathy, membranous neuropathy and idiopathic neuropathy), nephritic syndrome, ocular inflammation, optic neuritis, osteoarthritis, pancreatitis, paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobulinemia, pemphigus, polymyalgia, polymyositis, post- infectious autoimmunity, pulmonary fibrosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, psoriasis, pruritis, rheumatoid arthritis, reactive arthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, psoriatic arthritis, Raynaud's phenomenon, Reiter's syndrome, reperfusion injury, restenosis, sarcoidosis, scleritis, scleroderma, secondary hematologic manifestation of autoimmune diseases (such as, for example, anemias), silicone implant associated autoimmune disease, Sjogren's syndrome, systemic lupus erythematosus, thrombocytopenia, thrombosis, transverse myelitis, tubulointerstitial nephritis, ulcerative colitis, uveitis, vasculitis and vasculitis syndromes (such as, for example, giant cell arteritis, Behcet's disease and Wegener's granulomatosis), and vitiligo.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating a CXCR1 and/or CXCR2 mediated disease, as described above, in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of a compound selected from the group consisting of the final compounds of Examples 2 and 6, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.

In another embodiment this invention is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of this

invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. Examples of pain include, but are not limited to, the pain associated with: allodynia, ankylosing spondylitis, appendicitis, autoimmune disorders, bacterial infections, Behcet's syndrome, broken bones, bronchitis, burns, bursitis, cancer including metastatic cancer, candidiasis, cardiovascular conditions, casualgia, chemical injury, childbirth (e. g., labor), chronic regional neuropathies, Crohn's disease, colorectal cancer, connective tissue injuries, conjunctivitis, COPD, decreased intracranial pressure, dental procedures, dermatitis, diabetes, diabetic neuropathy, dysesthesia, dysmenorrhea, eczema, emphysema, fever, fibromyalgia, gastric ulcer, gastritis, giant cell arteritis, gingivitis, gout, gouty arthritis, headache, headache pain resulting from lumbar puncture, headaches including migraine headache, herpes simplex virus infections, HIV, Hodgkin's disease, hyperalgesia, hypersensitivity, inflammatory bowel disease, increased intracranial pressure, irritable bowel syndrome, ischemia, juvenile arthritis, kidney stones, lumbar spondylanhrosis, lower back, upper back and lumbrosacral conditions, lumbar spondylarthrosis, menstrual cramps, migraines, minor injuries, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, myocarditis, muscle strains, musculoskeletal conditions, myocardial ischemia, nephritic syndrome, nerve root avulsion, neuritis, nutritional deficiency, ocular and corneal conditions, ocular photophobia, ophthalmic diseases, osteoarthritis, otic surgery, otitis externa, otitis media, periarteritis nodosa, peripheral neuropathies, phantom limb pain, polymyositis, post-herpetic neuralgia, post- operative/surgical recovery, post-thoracotomy, psoriatic arthritis, pulmonary fibrosis, pulmonary edema, radiculopathy, reactive arthritis, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, retinitis, retinopathies, rheumatic fever, rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, sciatica, scleroderma, sickle cell anemia, sinus headaches, sinusitis, spinal cord injury, spondyloarthropathies, sprains, stroke, swimmer's ear, tendonitis, tension headaches, thalami syndrome, thrombosis, thyroiditis, toxins, traumatic injury, trigeminal neuralgia, ulcerative colitis, urogenital conditions, uveitis, vaginitis, vascular diseases, vasculitis, viral infections and/or wound healing.

In another embodiment this invention is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of this invention, or the pharmaceutical acceptable salts thereof, and administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one medicament selected from

the group consisting of: NSAIDs, COXIB inhibitors, anti-depressants and anti- convulsants. Examples of the pain treatable are described above.

In another embodiment this invention is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of this invention, or the pharmaceutical acceptable salts thereof, and administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one NSAIDs. Examples of the pain treatable are described above.

In another embodiment this invention is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of this invention, or the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one COXIB inhibitor. Examples of the pain treatable are described above.

In another embodiment this invention is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of this invention, or the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one anti-depressant. Examples of the pain treatable are described above.

In another embodiment this invention is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound of this invention, or the harmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one anti-convulsant. Examples of the pain treatable are described above.

In general the compounds of this invention used to treat pain will have CXCR2 antagonistic activity.

NSAIDs are well known to those skilled in the art and can be used in their known dosages and dosage regimens. Examples of NSAIDs include but are not limited to: piroxicam, ketoprofen, naproxen, indomethacin, and ibuprofen

COXIB inhibitors are well known to those skilled in the art and can be used in their known dosages and dosage regimens. Examples of COXIB inhibitors include but are not limited to: rofecoxib and celecoxib.

Anti-depressants are well known to those skilled in the art and can be used in their known dosages and dosage regimens. Examples of anti-depressants include but are not limited to: amitriptyline and nortriptyline.

Anti-convulsants are well known to those skilled in the art and can be used in their known dosages and dosage regimens. Examples of Anti-convulsants include but are not limited to: gabapentin, carbamazepine, pregabalin, and lamotragine.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating Kaposi's sarcoma, melanoma, gastric carcinoma, and non-small cell carcinoma in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one (e. g. , 1-3, usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof.

Another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating melanoma, gastric carcinoma, and non-small cell carcinoma in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient an effective amount of at least one (e. g. , 1-3, usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof.

Another embodiment of the present invention is directed to a method of treating cancer in a patient (e. g. , a mammal, such as a human being) in need of such treatment, comprising administering to said patient, concurrently or sequentially, a therapeutically effective amount of (a) at least one (e. g. , 1-3, and usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof, and (b) at least one (e. g. , 1,2 or 3) anticancer agent selected from the group consisting of: (1) microtubule affecting agents, (2) antineoplastic agents, (3) anti-angiogenesis agents, (4) VEGF receptor kinase inhibitors, (5) antibodies against the VEGF receptor, (6) interferon, and (7) radiation : In further embodiments of this invention that are directed to the treatment of cancer, at least one (e. g. , 1-3, and usually one) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is administered in combination with at least one (e. g. , 1 or 2, or 1) antineoplastic agent selected from the group consisting of:

gemcitabine, paclitaxel (Taxol ), 5-Fluorouracil (5-FU), cyclophosphamide (CytoxanG)), temozolomide, taxotere and Vincristine.

In another embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating cancer in a patient (e. g. , a mammal, such as a human being) in need of such treatment, comprising administering, concurrently or sequentially, an effective amount of (a) at least one (e. g. , 1-3, usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and (b) at least one (e. g. , 1-3, usually 1) microtubule affecting agent (e. g., paclitaxel).

In the method of treating a pulmonary disease (e. g. , COPD, asthma, or cystic fibrosis), at least one (usually 1) compound of formula IA, or a pharmaceutical acceptable salt thereof, is administered in combination with at least one compound selected from the group consisting of: glucocorticoids, 5-lipoxygenase inhibitors,-2 adrenoceptor agonists, muscarinic M1 antagonists, muscarinic M3 antagonists, muscarinic M2 agonists, NK3 antagonists, LTB4 antagonists, cysteinyl leukotriene antagonists, bronchodilators, PDE4 inhibitors, PDE inhibitors, elastase inhibitors, MMP inhibitors, phospholipase A2 inhibitors, phospholipase D inhibitors, histamine H1 antagonists, histamine H3 antagonists, dopamine agonists, adenosine A2 agonists, NK1 and NK2 antagonists, GABA-b agonists, nociceptin agonists, expectorants, mucolytic agents, decongestants, antioxidants, anti-IL-8 anti-bodies, anti-IL-5 antibodies, anti-lgE antibodies, anti-TNF antibodies, IL-10, adhesion molecule inhibitors, and growth hormones. Agents that belong to these classes include, but are not limited to, beclomethasone, mometasone, ciclesonide, budesonide, fluticasone, albuterol, salmeterol, formoterol, loratadine, desloratadine, tiotropium bromide, MSI- ipratropium bromide, montelukast, theophilline, cilomilast, roflumilast, cromolyn, ZD- 4407, talnetant, LTB-019, revatropate, pumafentrine, CP-955, AR-C-89855, BAY-19- 8004, GW-328267, QAB-149, DNK-333, YM-40461 and TH-9506 or pharmaceutical acceptable formulations thereof.

Representative embodiments of the novel compounds of this invention are described below. The embodiments have been numbered for purposes of reference thereto.

Embodiment No. 1 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 2 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is: and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 3 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is: and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 4 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is: and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 5 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is: and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 6 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 7 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is: and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 8 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is: and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 9 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 10 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is : and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 11 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is : and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 12 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is : and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 13 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is : and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 14 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is : and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 15 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is :

and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 16 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is : and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 17 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is : and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 18 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is : and all other substitutents are as defined for of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 19 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is selected from the group consisting of: (1)

and R3 for this B group is selected from the group consisting of:-C (O) NR13R14, and all other substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 20 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 21 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is

R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of H and alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 22 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is

wherein: (1) R2 is-OH and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA, or (2) R2 is-OH, and R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group, consisting of: H and alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), or (3) R2 is-OH, and R13 and R14 are the same or different and alkyl group (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), for example the same alkyl group, for example methyl, and (4) and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 23 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is R3 is selected from the group consisting of:

and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 24 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is R3 is selected from the group consisting of: R2 is-OH, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 25 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 26 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is-OH, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 27 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R2 is as defined for compounds of formula IA, R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of H and alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), and all other substituents areas defined for compounds of formula IA. For example, R13 and R14 are the same or different alkyl group. Also, for example, R13 and R14 are the same alkyl group. Also, for example, R13 and R14 are methyl.

Embodiment No. 28 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R2 is-OH, R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of H and alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), and all other substituents areas defined for compounds of formula IA. For example, R13 and R14 are the same or

different alkyl group. Also, for example, R13 and R14 are the same alkyl group. Also, for example, R13 and R14 are methyl.

Embodiment No. 29 is directed to novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in Embodiment No. 23, R4 is H, R5 is H, R6 is H, and all other substituents are as defined for compounds of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 30 is directed to novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in Embodiment No. 24, R4 is H, R5 is H, R6 is H, and all other substituents areas defined for compounds of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 31 is directed to novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in Embodiments Nos. 21,22, 25 and 26, except that R13 and R14 are each methyl, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 32 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R11 is H or methyl (preferably H), and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 33 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is-OH, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 34 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R3 is-C (o) NR13R14, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 35 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R3 is-S (O) tNR13R14 (e. g. , t is 2), and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 36 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R2 is-OH, R3 is-C (O) NR13R14, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 37 of this invention is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is-OH, and R3 is-S (O) tNR13R14 (e. g. , t is 2), and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 38 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is-OH, R3 is-C (O) NR13R14, R11 is H or methyl (preferably H), and all other substituents are as defined in formula 1A.

Embodiment No. 39 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is-OH, R3 is-S (O) tNR13R14 (e. g. , t is 2), R11 is H or methyl (preferably H), and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 40 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R2 is-OH, R3 is-C (o) NR13R14, R11 is H or methyl (preferably H), and R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl (e. g. , methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA. For example, one of R13 or R14 is alkyl (e. g., methyl). An example of a substituted heteroaryl group is Embodiment No. 41 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is-OH, R3 is -S(O)tNR13R14 (e. g. , t is 2), R11 is H or methyl (preferably H), and R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, and t-butyl), unsubstituted cycloalkyl, and substituted cycloalkyl, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA. For example R3 is (1)-S02NH2 or (2) -SO2NR13R14 wherein R13 and R14 are the same or different alkyl group (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), e. g. , the same alkyl group, such as, for example -SO2N (CH3) 2.

Embodiment No. 42 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R"is H, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 43 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R2 is-OH, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 44 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R3 is-C (O) NR13R14, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 45 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R3 is-S (O) tNR13R14 (e. g., t is 2), and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 46 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is-OH, R3 is-C (O) NR13R14, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 47 of this invention is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is-OH, and R3 is-S (O) tNR13R14 (e. g., t is 2), and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 48 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is:

R2 is-OH, R3 is-C (O) NR13R14, R11 is H, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 49 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is-OH, R3 is-S (O) tNR13R14 (e. g. , t is 2), R"is H, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 50 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is -OH, R3 is -C(O)NR13R14, R11 is H, and R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, unsubstituted heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl, and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA. For example, one of R13 or R14 is alkyl (e. g., methyl). An example of a substituted heteroaryl group is Embodiment No. 51 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is: R2 is-OH, R3 is-S (o) tNR13R14 (e. g. , t is 2), R11 is H, R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of: H and alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, and t- butyl), and all other substituents are as defined in formula IA. For example R3 is (1) -SO2NH2 and (2) -SO2NR13R14 wherein R13 and R14 are the same or different alkyl group (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), e. g. , the same alkyl group, such as, for example-S02N (CH3) 2.

Embodiment No. 52 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein R2 to R6 and R10 to R14 are as defined above for the compounds of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 53 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B in formula is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of: H, OH,-NHC (O) R13 or and-NHSO2R'3 ; R3 is selected from the group consisting of :-So2NR13R14,-NO2, cyano, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO2R13 ; and-C (O) oR13 ; R4 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-N02, cyano,-CH3, halogen, and-CF3 ; R5 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-NO2, halogen and cyano; R6 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl and-CF3 ;

each R10 and R11 is independently selected from the group consisting of: R hydrogen, halogen, -CF3, -NR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)OR13, -SH, -SO(t)NR13R14, -SO2R13, -NHC(O)R13, -NHSO2NR13R14, -NHSO2R13, -C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, -OC(O)R13, -COR13, -OR13, and cyano; each R13 and R14 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, methyl, ethyl and isopropyl ; or R13 and R14 when taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups -NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO2NR13R14, -OC(O)NR13R14, -CONR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -SOtNR13R14, -NHSO2NR13R14 form an unsubstituted or substituted saturated heterocyclic ring (preferably a 3 to 7 membered ring) optionally having one additional heteroatom selected from the group consisting of: O, S or NR13 ; wherein R'8 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -C(O)R19, -SO2R19 and-C (O) NR19R20 ; wherein each R'9 and R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl ; wherein there are 1 to 3 substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups (i. e. , the substituents on the ring formed when R13 and R14 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are bound) and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C (O) OR -C(O)NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15 provided that R15 is not H, -NHC(O)NR15R16 and halogen ; and wherein each R15 and R16 is independently selected from the group consisting: of H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl.

Embodiment No. 54 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B in formula selected from the group consisting of: wherein: R2 is selected from the group consisting of: H, OH,-NHC (O) R13 and -NHSo2R13 ;

R3 is selected from the group consisting of: -C(O)NR13R14, -SO2NR13R14, -NR2, cyano, -SO2R13 ; and-C (O) oR13 ; R4 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-N02, cyano,-CH3 or-CF3 ; R5 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-N02, halogen and cyano; and R6 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl and-CF3 ; R"is selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen and alkyl ; and each R13 and R14 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, methyl, ethyl and isopropyl ; or R13 and R14 when taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups -NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO2NR13R14, -OC(O)NR13R14, -CONR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -SOtNR13R14, -NHSO2NR13R14 form an unsubstituted or substituted saturated heterocyclic ring (preferably a 3 to 7 membered ring) optionally having one additional heteroatom selected from O, S or NR18 wherein R18 is selected from H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,-C (O) R'9,-S02R'9 and-C (O) NR19R, wherein each R19 and R20 is independently selected from alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl, wherein there are 1 to 3 substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups (i. e. , on the ring formed when R13 and R14 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are bound) and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C (O) OR15, -C(O)NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15 provided that R15 is not H,-NHC (O) NR15R16 and halogen ; and wherein each R15 and R16 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl.

Embodiment No. 55 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is selected from the group consisting of:

R2 is selected from the group consisting of: H, OH,-NHC (O) R13 and -NHSO2R13; R3 is selected from the group consisting of: -C(O)NR13R14 -SO2NR13R14, -NO2, cyano, and -SO2R13 ; R4 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-N02, cyano,-CH3 or-CF3 ; R5 is selected from the group consisting of: H, -CF3, -NO2, halogen and cyano; and R6 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl and-CF3 ; R"is selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen and alkyl ; and each R13 and R14 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, methyl and ethyl.

Embodiment No. 56 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is selected from the group consisting of: wherein: R2 is-OH ; R3 is selected from the group consisting of : -SO2NR13R14 and -CONR13R14 ; R4 is selected form the group consisting of: H,-CH3 and-CF3 ; R5 is selected from the group consisting of: H and cyano; R6 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CH3 and-CF3 ; R11 is H; and R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of H and methyl (e. g., for -SO2NR13R14 both R13 and R14 are H, or both R13 and R14 are methyl, also, for example, for -CONR13R14 both R13 and I R14 are methyl) Embodiment No. 57 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is selected from the group consisting of: wherein all substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 58 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is selected from the group consisting of:

Embodiment No. 59 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is selected from the group consisting of:

Embodiment No. 60 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is selected from the group consisting of: Embodiment No. 61 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is selected from the group consisting of:

Embodiment No. 62 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is : Embodiment No. 63 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is :

Embodiment No. 64 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent B is :

Embodiment No. 65 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein: substituent A is selected from the group consisting of: (a)

wherein the above rings are unsubstituted or substituted, as described for formula IA : and

wherein in (a) and (b): each R and R3 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl,

unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, -CO2R13, -CONR13R14, fluoralkyl, alkynyl, alkenyl, and cycloalkenyl, wherein said substituents on said R7 and R3 substituted groups are selected from the group consisting of: a) cyano, b)-C02R c) -C(O)NR13R14, d) -SO2NR13R14, e) -NO2, f) -CF3, g) -OR13, h) - NR13R14, i)-OC (O) R13, j) -OC(O)NR13R14, and k) halogen ; and R8a and R9 are as defined in formula IA.

Embodiment No. 66 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of: (a)

wherein the above rings are unsubstituted, or the above rings are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: halogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl,-CF3, cyano,-OCH3, and-NO2 ; each R 7 and R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, and isopropyl), fluoroalkyl (such as,-CF3 and-CF2CH3), cycloalkyl (e. g., cyclopropyl, and cyclohexyl), and cycloalkylalkyl (e. g., cyclopropylmethyl) ; and R9 is selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl,-CF3, cyano,-OCH3, and-NO2 ; and (b) wherein each R7 and R3 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, and isopropyl), fluoroalkyl (such as,-CF3 and -CF2CH3), cycloalkyl (e. g., cyclopropyl, and cyclohexyl), and cycloalkylalkyl (e. g., cyclopropylmethyl) ; wherein R3a is as defined in formula IA, and wherein R9 is selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl,-CF3, cyano, -OCH3, and-NO2 ; each R and R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, and isopropyl), fluoroalkyl (such as,-CF3 and -CF2CH3), cycloalkyl (e. g., cyclopropyl, and cyclohexyl), and cycloalkylalkyl (e. g., cyclopropylmethyl).

Embodiment No. 67 is directed to the novel compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of: (a)

wherein the above rings are unsubstituted, or the above rings are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl, cycloalkyl, and-CF3 ; R7 is selected from the group consisting of: H, fluoroalkyl, alkyl and cycloalkyl ; R8 is selected form the group consisting of: H, alkyl,-CF2CH3 and -CF3 ; and R9 is selected from the group consisting of: H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl or-CF3 ; and

wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of: H, fluoroalkyl, alkyl and cycloalkyl ; R is selected form the group consisting of: H, alkyl,-CF2CH3 and-CF3 ; and R8a is as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 68 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of: (a)

wherein the above rings are unsubstituted, or the above rings are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl, cycloalkyl, and-CF3 ; R 7is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl and t-butyl ; and R8 is H; and wherein R 7is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl and t-butyl ; and R8 is H; and R3a is as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 69 is directed compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of: (a)

wherein the above rings are unsubstituted, or the above rings are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: F, Cl, Br, alkyl, cycloalkyl, and-CF3 ; R7 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl and t-butyl ; and R8 is H; and wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl and t-butyl ; and R8 is H; and R8a is as defined for formula IA; Embodiment No. 70 is directed compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of: (1) unsubstituted or substituted: wherein all substitutents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 71 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of:

Embodiment No. 72 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of:

Embodiment No. 73 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of: Embodiment No. 74 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent

A is selected from the group consisting of: Embodiment No. 75 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of:

Embodiment No. 76 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is: Embodiment No. 77 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is:

Embodiment No. 78 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is: Embodiment No. 79 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is: Embodiment No. 80 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of: and substituent B is selected from the group consisting of:

Embodiment No. 81 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is selected from the group consisting of: and substituent B is selected from the group consisting of:

Embodiment No. 82 is directed to novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, and A is as defined in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 65 to 79.

Embodiment No. 83 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, and A is: and all other substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 84 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, and A is:

wherein R7 is H, and R8 is alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl and t-butyl), and all other substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 85 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, and A is:

and all other substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 86 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, and A is:

wherein the furan ring is unsubstituted or substituted as described in the definition of A for formula IA, and all other substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 87 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, and A is

wherein the furan ring is substituted and all other substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 88 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, and A is wherein the furan ring is substituted with at least one (e. g. , 1 to 3, or 1 to 2) alkyl group and all other substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 89 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, A is wherein the furan ring is substituted with one alkyl group and all other substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 90 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, and A is wherein the furan ring is substituted with one Cl to C3 alkyl group (e. g., methyl or isopropyl), and all other substituents are as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 91 is directed to novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, and A is as defined in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 86 to 90, except that R7 and R8 are the same or different and each is selected from the group consisting of: H and alkyl.

Embodiment No. 92 is directed to novel compounds of formula IA wherein B is as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 64, and A is as defined in any

one of the Embodiment Nos. 86 to 90, except that R7 is H, and R is alkyl (e. g., ethyl or t-butyl).

Embodiment No. 93 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein: (1) substituent A in formula IA is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein the above rings are unsubstituted or substituted, as described for formula IA : and

wherein in (a) and (b) above: each R7 and R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted or substituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heteroarylalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkylalkyl, -CO2R13, -CONR13R14, fluoroalkyl, alkynyl, alkenyl, and cycloalkenyl, wherein said substituents on said R7 and R8 substituted groups are selected from the group consisting of: a) cyano, b)-C02R c) -C(O)NR13R14, d) -SO2NR13R14, e) -NO2, f) -CF3, g) -OR13, h) -NR13R14, i)-OC (O) R13, j)-oC (o) NR13R14, and k) halogen ; and R8a and R9 are as defined in formula IA; and (2) substituent B in formula IA is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein R2 to R6 and R10to R14 are as defined above for the novel compounds of formula IA.

Embodiment No. 94 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein: (1) substituent A in formula IA is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein the above rings are unsubstituted, or the above rings are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: halogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl,-CF3, cyano,-OCH3, and-N02 ; each R7 and R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, and isopropyl), fluoroalkyl (such as,-CF3 and-CF2CH3), cycloalkyl (e. g., cyclopropyl, and cyclohexyl), and cycloalkylalkyl (e. g., cyclopropylmethyl) ; and R9 is selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl,-CF3, cyano,-OCH3, and-NO2 ; and

wherein each R7 and R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, and isopropyl), fluoroalkyl (such as,-CF3 and -CF2CH3), cycloalkyl (e. g., cyclopropyl, and cyclohexyl), and cycloalkylalkyl (e. g., cyclopropylmethyl) ; wherein R3a is as defined in formula IA, and wherein R9 is selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl,-CF3, cyano, - OCH3, and-N02 ; each R7 and R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl (e. g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, and isopropyl), fluoroalkyl (such as,-CF3 and -CF2CH3), cycloalkyl (e. g., cyclopropyl, and cyclohexyl), and cycloalkylalkyl (e. g., cyclopropylmethyl) ; and (2) substituent B in formula IA is selected from the group consisting of: wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of: H, OH,-NHC (O) R13 or and-NHSo2R13 ; R3 is selected from the group consisting of :-So2NR13R14,-NO2, cyano, - C(O)NR13R14, -SO2R13 ; and-C (O) OR13 ; R4 is selected from the group consisting of: H, -NO2, cyano,-CH3, halogen, and-CF3 ;

R5 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-N02, halogen and cyano; R6 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl and-CF3 ; each R10 and R11 is independently selected from the group consisting of: R hydrogen, halogen, -CF3, -NR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)OR13, -SH, -SO SO(t)NR13R14, -SO2R13, -NHC(O)R13, -NHSO2NR13R14, -NHSO2R13, -C(O)NR13R14, -C(O)NR13OR14, -OC(O)R13, -COR13, -OR13, and cyano; each R13 and R14 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, methyl, ethyl and isopropyl ; or R13 and R14 when taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups -NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO2NR13R14, -OC(O)NR13R14, -CONR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -SOtNR13R14, -NHSO2NR13R14 form an unsubstituted or substituted saturated heterocyclic ring (preferably a 3 to 7 membered ring) optionally having one additional heteroatom selected from the group consisting of: O, S or NR13 ; wherein R18 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, -C(O)R19, -SO2R19 and-C (O) NR19R20 ; wherein each R19 and R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl ; wherein there are 1 to 3 substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups (i. e. , the substituents on the ring formed when R13 and R14 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are bound) and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C (O) OR -C(O)NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15 provided that R15 is not H, -NHC(O)NR15R16 and halogen ; and wherein each R15 and R16 is independently selected from the group consisting: of H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl.

Embodiment No. 95 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A in formula IA is even more preferably selected from the group consisting of:

wherein the above rings are unsubstituted, or the above rings are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl, cycloalkyl, and-CF3 ; R7 is selected from the group consisting of: H, fluoroalkyl, alkyl and cycloalkyl ; R8 is selected form the group consisting of: H, alkyl,-CF2CH3 and -CF3 ; and R9 is selected from the group consisting of: H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl or-CF3 ; and wherein R is selected from the group consisting of: H, fluoroalkyl, alkyl and cycloalkyl ; R is selected form the group consisting of: H, alkyl,-CF2CH3 and-CF3 ; and R8a is as defined for formula IA.

Embodiment No. 96 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein: (1) substituent A in formula IA is selected from the group consisting of: (a)

wherein the above rings are unsubstituted, or the above rings are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: H, F, Cl, Br, alkyl, cycloalkyl, and-CF3 ; R7 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl and t-butyl ; and R3 is H; and (b)

wherein R is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl and t-butyl ; and R is H; and R8a is as defined for formula IA.

(2) substituent B in formula IA is selected from the group consisting of:

R2 is selected from the group consisting of: H, OH,-NHC (O) R13 and -NHSO2R13; selected from the group consisting of: -C(O)NR13R14, -SO2NR13R14, -NO2, cyano, -SO2R13 ; and-C (O) oR13 ; R4 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-N02, cyano, alkyl (e. g.,-CH3 and ethyl),-CF3, and halogen ; R5 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-N02, halogen and cyano; and R6 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl and-CF3 ; R11 is selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen and alkyl ; and each R13 and R14 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, methyl, ethyl and isopropyl ; or R13 and R14 when taken together with the nitrogen they are attached to in the groups-NR13R14, -C(O)NR13R14, -SO2NR13R14, -OC(O)NR13R14, -CONR13R14, -NR13C(O)NR13R14, -SOtNR13R14, -NHSO2NR13R14 form an unsubstituted or substituted saturated heterocyclic ring (preferably a 3 to 7 membered ring) optionally having one additional heteroatom selected from 0, S or NR18 wherein R18 is selected from H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,-C (O) R19, -SO2R19 and-C (O) NR19R, wherein each R19 and R20 is independently selected from alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl, wherein there are 1 to 3 substituents on the substituted cyclized R13 and R14 groups (i. e. , on the ring formed when R13 and R14 are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are bound) and each substituent is independently selected from the group consisting of: alkyl, aryl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxy, alkoxyalkyl, arylalkyl, fluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino, -C (O) OR15, -C (O) NR15R16, -SOtNR15R16, -C(O)R15, -SO2R15 provided that R15 is not H,-NHC (O) NR15R16 and halogen ; and wherein each R15 and R16 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl and heteroaryl.

Embodiment No. 97 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein: (1) substituent A in formula IA is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein the above rings are unsubstituted, or the above rings are substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: F, Cl, Br, alkyl, cycloalkyl, and-CF3 ; R7 is selected from the group consisting of: H, -CF3, -CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl and t-butyl ; and R8 is H; and wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-CF2CH3, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl and t-butyl ; and R8 is H; and R8a is as defined for formula IA; (2) substituent B in formula IA is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein: R2 is selected from the group consisting of: H, OH,-NHC (O) R13 and -NHSO2R13; R3 is selected from the group consisting of:-C (O) NR13R14 -SO2NR13R14, -NO2, cyano, and -SO2R13 ;

R4 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-N02, cyano, alkyl (e. g.,-CH3 and ethyl),-CF3 and halogen ; R5 is selected from the group consisting of: H,-CF3,-N02, halogen and cyano; and R6 is selected from the group consisting of: H, alkyl and-CF3 ; R11 is selected from the group consisting of: H, halogen and alkyl ; and each R13 and R14 is independently selected from the group consisting of: H and unsubstituted alkyl (e. g., methyl and ethyl).

Embodiment No. 98 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein: (1) substituent A in formula IA is selected from the group consisting of:

(2) substituent B in formula IA is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein: R2 is-OH ; R3 is selected from the group consisting of: -SO2NR13R14 and -CONR13R14 ; R4 is selected form the group consisting of: H, Br,-CH3, ethyl and-CF3 ; R5 is selected from the group consisting of: H and cyano; R6 is selected from the group consisting of: H, -CH2 and -CF3 ; R"is H; and R13 and R14 are independently selected from the group consisting of H and methyl (e. g., for-So2NR13R14 both R13 and R14 are H, or both R13 and R14 are methyl, also, for example, for -CONR13R14 both R13 and R14 are methyl) Embodiment No. 99 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 70 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 57.

Embodiment No. 100 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 70 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 58.

Embodiment No. 101 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 70 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 59.

Embodiment No. 102 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 71 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 57.

Embodiment No. 103 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 71 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 58.

Embodiment No. 104 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 71 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 59.

Embodiment No. 105 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 72 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 57.

Embodiment No. 106 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 72 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 58.

Embodiment No. 107 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 72 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 59.

Embodiment No. 108 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 73 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 57.

Embodiment No. 109 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 73 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 58.

Embodiment No. 110 is directed to compounds of formula IA wherein substituent A is as defined in Embodiment No. 73 and substituent B is as defined in Embodiment No. 59.

Embodiment No. 111 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is H.

Embodiment No. 112 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R is-C (O) R Embodiment No. 113 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-C (O) R13 and wherein R13 in said R50 substituent is alkyl.

Embodiment No. 114 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-C (O) C2H5.

Embodiment No. 115 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R is-C (O) OR Embodiment No. 116 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-C (O) oR13 and wherein R13 in said R50 substituent is alkyl.

Embodiment No. 117 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-C (O) OC2H5.

Embodiment No. 117 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-C (O) NR'3R'4.

Embodiment No. 118 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-C (O) NR13R14 and wherein R13 and R14 in said R50 substituent are each independently selected from the group consisting of: H and alkyl.

Embodiment No. 119 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-C (O) NH2.

Embodiment No. 120 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-C (O) N (CH3) 2.

Embodiment No. 121 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-S (O) 2NR13R14.

Embodiment No. 122 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-S (O) 2NR13R14 and wherein R13 and R14 in said R50 substituent are each independently selected from the group consisting of: H and alkyl.

Embodiment No. 123 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-S (O) 2NH2.

Embodiment No. 124 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-CF3.

Embodiment No. 125 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is-CN.

Embodiment No. 126 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is -NO2.

Embodiment No. 127 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R is -NR13R14.

Embodiment No. 128 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is R13 Embodiment No. 129 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 110 wherein R50 is halo (e. g., Cl or Br).

Embodiment No. 130 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 129 wherein the compound of formula IA is a compound of formula IA. 1.

Embodiment No. 131 is directed to any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 129 wherein the compound of formula IA is a compound of formula IA. 2.

Embodiment No. 132 is directed to any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 131 wherein the compound of formula IA is a pharmaceutical acceptable salt.

Embodiment No. 133 is directed to any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 131 wherein the compound of formula IA is a sodium salt.

Embodiment No. 134 is directed to any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 131 wherein the compound of formula IA is a calcium salt.

Embodiment No. 135 is directed to a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of any one of the representative compounds of this invention that are described below.

Embodiment No. 136 is directed to a sodium salt of any one of the representative compounds described below.

Embodiment No. 137 is directed to a calcium salt of any one of the representative compounds described below.

Embodiment No. 138 is directed to a pharmaceutical composition comprising at least one (e. g. , 1 to 3, usually 1) compound of formula IA as described in any one of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137 in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier (or diluent). When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 139 is directed to a method of treating any one of the diseases or conditions described herein (i. e. , the chemokine mediated diseases or conditions) comprising administering to a patient in need of such treatment an effective amount (e. g. , a therapeutically effective amount) of a compound of formula IA as described in any one of the Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 140 is directed to a method of treating any one of the diseases described herein (i. e. , the chemokine mediated diseases) comprising administering to a patient in need of such treatment an effective amount (e. g. , a therapeutically effective amount) of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment No. 138.

Embodiment No. 141 is directed to a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of

Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 142 is directed to a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment No. 138.

Embodiment No. 143 is directed to a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one (usually 1) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137 in combination with at least one compound selected from the group consisting of COX-2 inhibitors, COX inhibitors, immunosuppressives (e. g., methotrexate, cyclosporin, leflunimide and sulfasalazine), steroids (e. g., betamethasone, cortisone and dexamethasone), PDE IV inhibitors, anti-TNF-a compounds, MMP inhibitors, glucocorticoids, chemokine inhibitors, CB2-selective inhibitors, and other classes of compounds indicated for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis. When more than one compound of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137 is used, each compound is independently selected from said Embodiment Numbers.

Embodiment No. 144 is directed to a method of treating rheumatoid arthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment 138 in combination with at least one compound selected from the group consisting of COX-2 inhibitors, COX inhibitors, immunosuppressives (e. g., methotrexate, cyclosporin, leflunimide and sulfasalazine), steroids (e. g., betamethasone, cortisone and dexamethasone), PDE IV inhibitors, anti-TNF-a compounds, MMP inhibitors, glucocorticoids, chemokine inhibitors, CB2-selective inhibitors, and other classes of compounds indicated for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.

Embodiment No. 145 is directed to a method of treating COPD in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 146 is directed to a method of treating COPD in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment 138.

Embodiment No. 147 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 148 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment 138.

Embodiment No. 149 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137, and administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one medicament selected from the group consisting of NSAIDs, COXIB inhibitors, anti- depressants and anti-convulsants. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 150 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment 138, and administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one medicament selected from the group consisting of NSAIDs, COXIB inhibitors, anti-depressants and anti-convulsants.

Embodiment No. 151 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137, and administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one NSAID. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 152 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically

effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment 138, and administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one NSAID.

Embodiment No. 153 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137, and administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one COXIB inhibitor. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 154 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment 137, and administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one COXIB inhibitor.

Embodiment No. 155 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137, and administering a therapeutical effective amount of at least one anti-depressant. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 156 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment 138, and administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one anti-depressant.

Embodiment No. 157 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137, and administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one anti-convulsant. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 158 is directed to a method of treating pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment 138, and administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one anti-convusant.

Embodiment No. 159 is directed to a method of treating pain in any one of Embodiment Nos. 149-152 wherein said NSAID is selected from the group consisting of: piroxicam, ketoprofen, naproxen, indomethacin, and ibuprofen.

Embodiment No. 160 is directed to a method of treating pain in any one of Embodiment Nos. 149,150, 153 and 154 wherein said COXIB inhibitor is selected from the group consisting of: rofecoxib and celecoxib.

Embodiment No. 160 is directed to a method of treating pain in any one of Embodiment Nos. 149,150, 155 and 156 wherein said anti-depressant is selected from the group consisting of: amitriptyline and nortriptyline.

Embodiment No. 162 is directed to a method of treating pain in any one of Embodiment Nos. 149,150, 157 and 158 wherein said anti-convulsant is selected from the group consisting of: gabapentin, carbamazepine, pregabalin, and lamotragine.

Embodiment No. 163 is directed to a method of treating pain described by any one of Embodiment Nos. 147 to 162 wherein the pain treated is pain associated with: allodynia, ankylosing spondylitis, appendicitis, autoimmune disorders, bacterial infections, Behcet's syndrome, broken bones, bronchitis, burns, bursitis, cancer including metastatic cancer, candidiasis, cardiovascular conditions, casualgia, chemical injury, childbirth (e. g., labor), chronic regional neuropathies, Crohn's disease, colorectal cancer, connective tissue injuries, conjunctivitis, COPD, decreased intracranial pressure, dental procedures, dermatitis, diabetes, diabetic neuropathy, dysesthesia, dysmenorrhea, eczema, emphysema, fever, fibromyalgia, gastric ulcer, gastritis, giant cell arteritis, gingivitis, gout, gouty arthritis, headache, headache pain resulting from lumbar puncture, headaches including migraine headache, herpes simplex virus infections, HIV, Hodgkin's disease, hyperalgesia, hypersensitivity, inflammatory bowel disease, increased intracranial pressure, irritable bowel syndrome, ischemia, juvenile arthritis, kidney stones, lumbar spondylanhrosis, lower back, upper back and lumbrosacral conditions, lumbar spondylarthrosis, menstrual cramps, migraines, minor injuries, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, myocarditis, muscle strains, musculoskeletal conditions, myocardial ischemia, nephritic syndrome, nerve root avulsion, neuritis, nutritional deficiency, ocular and corneal conditions, ocular photophobia, ophthalmic diseases, osteoarthritis, otic surgery, otitis externa, otitis media, periarteritis nodosa, peripheral neuropathies, phantom limb pain,

polymyositis, post-herpetic neuralgia, post-operative/surgical recovery, post- thoracotomy, psoriatic arthritis, pulmonary fibrosis, pulmonary edema, radiculopathy, reactive arthritis, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, retinitis, retinopathies, rheumatic fever, rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, sciatica, scleroderma, sickle cell anemia, sinus headaches, sinusitis, spinal cord injury, spondyloarthropathies, sprains, stroke, swimmer's ear, tendonitis, tension headaches, thalami syndrome, thrombosis, thyroiditis, toxins, traumatic injury, trigeminal neuralgia, ulcerative colitis, urogenital conditions, uveitis, vaginitis, vascular diseases, vasculitis, viral infections and/or wound healing.

Embodiment No. 164 is directed to a method of treating acute pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 165 is directed to a method of treating acute pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment No.

138.

Embodiment No. 166 is directed to a method of treating acute inflammatory pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 167 is directed to a method of treating acute inflammatory pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment No. 138.

Embodiment No. 168 is directed to a method of treating chronic inflammatory pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 169 is directed to a method of treating chronic inflammatory pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment No. 138.

Embodiment No. 170 is directed to a method of treating neuropathic pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 171 is directed to a method of treating neuropathic pain in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment No. 138.

Embodiment No. 172 is directed to a method of treating pain as described in any of Embodiment Nos. 149 to 162 wherein said pain is acute pain.

Embodiment No. 173 is directed to a method of treating pain as described in any of Embodiment Nos. 149 to 162 wherein said pain is acute inflammatory pain.

Embodiment No. 174 is directed to a method of treating pain as described in any of Embodiment Nos. 149 to 162 wherein said pain is chronic inflammatory pain.

Embodiment No. 175 is directed to a method of treating pain as described in any of Embodiment Nos. 149 to 162 wherein said pain is neuropathic pain.

Embodiment No. 176 is directed to a method of treating arthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137.

Embodiment No. 177 is directed to a method of treating arthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment No.

138.

Embodiment No. 178 is directed to a method of treating osteoarthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one (usually one) compound from any of

Embodiment Nos. 1 to 137. When more than one compound is used each compound is independently selected from the group consisting of Embodiment Nos. 1 to 138.

Embodiment No. 179 is directed to a method of treating osteoarthritis in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition described in Embodiment No. 138.

Representative compounds include the final compounds of Examples 1-6, 100- 119,121-124, 129-150,152-155, 160-181,183-186, 191-213,214-217, and 222-263, or the pharmaceutical acceptable salts thereof.

Preferred compounds of the invention are the final compounds of Examples 1, 2,6, 100,101, 103,104, 105,107, 109,110, 111,113, 114,115, 117,118, 119,123, 129,131, 132,134, 136,138, 140,141, 144,145, 146,148, 149,162, 163,165, 167, 173,177, 194,197, 198,204, 208,225, 229,235, 255,256 or the pharmaceutical acceptable salts thereof.

More preferred compounds of the invention are the final compounds of Examples 1,2, 6,100, 101,103, 104,105, 109,110, 111,113, 114,115, 117,118, 119,129, 131,132, 134,136, 141,146, 162,163, 165,167, 173,177, 194,197, 198, 204,208, 225,229, 235,255, 256, or the pharmaceutical acceptable salts thereof.

Most preferred compounds of the invention are the final compounds of Examples 1,2, 6,100, 101,104, 105,111, 115,119, 129,132, 136,229, 235,256, or the pharmaceutical acceptable salts thereof.

Certain compounds of the invention may exist in different stereoisomeric forms (e. g. , enantiomers, diastereoisomers and atropisomers). The invention contemplates all such stereoisomers both in pure form and in admixture, including racemic mixtures.

Isomers can be prepared using conventional methods.

All stereoisomers (for example, geometric isomers, optical isomers and the like) of the present compounds (including those of the salts, solvates and prodrugs of the compounds as well as the salts and solvates of the prodrugs), such as those which may exist due to asymmetric carbons on various substituents, including enantiomeric forms (which may exist even in the absence of asymmetric carbons), rotameric forms, atropisomers, and diastereomeric forms, are contemplated within the scope of this invention. Individual stereoisomers of the compounds of the invention may, for

example, be substantially free of other isomers, or may be admixed, for example, as racemates or with all other, or other selected, stereoisomers. The chiral centers of the present invention can have the S or R configuration as defined by the IUPAC 1974 Recommendations. The use of the terms"salt","solvate""prodrug"and the like, is intended to equally apply to the salt, solvate and prodrug of enantiomers, stereoisomers, rotamers, tautomers, racemates or prodrugs of the inventive compounds.

Certain compounds will be acidic in nature, e. g. those compounds which possess a carboxyl or phenolic hydroxyl group. These compounds may form pharmaceutically acceptable salts. Examples of such salts may include sodium, potassium, calcium, aluminum, gold and silver salts. Also contemplated are salts formed with pharmaceutically acceptable amines such as ammonia, alkyl amines, hydroxyalkylamines, N-methylglucamine and the like.

Certain basic compounds also form pharmaceutically acceptable salts, e. g., acid addition salts. For example, the pyrido-nitrogen atoms may form salts with strong acid, while compounds having basic substituents such as amino groups also form salts with weaker acids. Examples of suitable acids for salt formation are hydrochloric, sulfuric, phosphoric, acetic, citric, oxalic, malonic, salicylic, malic, fumaric, succinic, ascorbic, maleic, methanesulfonic and other mineral and carboxylic acids well known to those skilled in the art. The salts are prepared by contacting the free base form with a sufficient amount of the desired acid to produce a salt in the conventional manner. The free base forms may be regenerated by treating the salt with a suitable dilute aqueous base solution such as dilute aqueous NaOH, potassium carbonate, ammonia and sodium bicarbonate. The free base forms differ from their respective salt forms somewhat in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents, but the acid and base salts are otherwise equivalent to their respective free base forms for purposes of the invention.

All such acid and base salts are intended to be pharmaceutically acceptable salts within the scope of the invention and all acid and base salts are considered equivalent to the free forms of the corresponding compounds for purposes of the invention.

Compounds of formula IA can exist in unsolvated and solvate forms (or compounds of formula IA can optionally be converted to a solvate), including hydrated

forms. In general, the solvate forms, with pharmaceutical acceptable solvents such as water, ethanol and the like, are equivalent to the unsolvated forms for the purposes of this invention.

Preparation of solvates is generally known. Thus, for example, M. Caira et al, J. Pharmaceutical Sci., 93 (3), 601-611 (2004) describe the preparation of the solvates of the antifungal fluconazole in ethyl acetate as well as from water. Similar preparations of solvates, hemisolvate, hydrates and the like are described by E. C. van Tonder et al, AAPS PharmSciTech., 5 (1), article 12 (2004); and A. L. Bingham et al, Chem. Commun., 603-604 (2001). A typical, non-limiting, process involves dissolving the inventive compound in desired amounts of the desired solvent (organic or water or mixtures thereof) at a higher than ambient temperature, and cooling the solution at a rate sufficient to form crystals which are then isolated by standard methods. Analytical techniques such as, for example l. R. spectroscopy, show the presence of the solvent (or water) in the crystals as a solvate (or hydrate).

This invention also includes Prodrugs of the novel compounds of this invention.

The term"prodrug, "as used herein, represents compounds that are rapidly transformed in vivo to the parent compound (i. e. , a compound of formula IA), for example, by hydrolysis in blood. A thorough discussion is provided in T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14 of the A. C. S. Symposium Series, and in Edward B. Roche, ed., Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, both of which are incorporated herein by reference.

This invention also includes the compounds of this invention in isolated and pure form.

This invention also includes polymorphic forms of the compounds of this invention. The polymorphic forms of the compounds of formula IA, and of the salts, solvates and prodrugs of the compounds of formula IA, are intended to be included in the present invention.

For preparing pharmaceutical compositions from the compounds described by this invention, inert, pharmaceutical acceptable carriers can be either solid or liquid.

Solid form preparations include powders, tablets, dispersible granules, capsules, cachets and suppositories. The powders and tablets may be comprised of from about 5 to about 95 percent active ingredient. Suitable solid carriers are known in the art,

e. g. , magnesium carbonate, magnesium stearate, talc, sugar or lactose. Tablets, powders, cachets and capsules can be used as solid dosage forms suitable for oral administration. Examples of pharmaceutical acceptable carriers and methods of manufacture for various compositions may be found in A. Gennaro (ed. ), Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Edition, (2000), Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, MD..

Liquid form preparations include solutions, suspensions and emulsions. As an example may be mentioned water or water-propylene glycol solutions for parenteral injection or addition of sweeteners and opacifiers for oral solutions, suspensions and emulsions. Liquid form preparations may also include solutions for intranasal administration.

Aerosol preparations suitable for inhalation may include solutions and solids in powder form, which may be in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, such as an inert compressed gas, e. g. nitrogen.

Also included are solid form preparations that are intended to be converted, shortly before use, to liquid form preparations for either oral or parenteral administration. Such liquid forms include solutions, suspensions and emulsions.

The compounds of the invention may also be deliverable transdermally. The transdermal composition can take the form of creams, lotions, aerosols and/or emulsions and can be included in a transdermal patch of the matrix or reservoir type as are conventional in the art for this purpose.

Preferably the compound is administered orally.

Preferably, the pharmaceutical preparation is in a unit dosage form. In such form, the preparation is subdivided into suitably sized unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the active component, e. g. , an effective amount to achieve the desired purpose.

The quantity of active compound in a unit dose of preparation may be varied or adjusted from about 0.01 mg to about 1000 mg, preferably from about 0.01 mg to about 750 mg, more preferably from about 0.01 mg to about 500 mg, and most preferably from about 0.01 mg to about 250 mg, according to the particular application.

The actual dosage employed may be varied depending upon the requirements of the patient and the severity of the condition being treated. Determination of the

proper dosage regimen for a particular situation is within the skill of the art. For convenience, the total dosage may be divided and administered in portions during the day as required.

The amount and frequency of administration of the compounds of the invention and/or the pharmaceutical acceptable salts thereof will be regulated according to the judgment of the attending clinician considering such factors as age, condition and size of the patient as well as severity of the symptoms being treated. A typical recommended daily dosage regimen for oral administration can range from about 0.04 mg/day to about 4000 mg/day, in two to four divided doses.

Classes of compounds that can be used as the chemotherapeutic agent (antineoplastic agent) include : alkylating agents, antimetabolites, natural products and their derivatives, hormones and steroids (including synthetic analogs), and synthetics.

Examples of compounds within these classes are given below.

Alkylating agents (including nitrogen mustards, ethylenimine derivatives, alkyl sulfonates, nitrosoureas and triazenes): Uracil mustard, Chlormethine, Cyclophosphamide (Cytoxan@), Ifosfamide, Melphalan, Chlorambucil, Pipobroman, Triethylene-melamine, Triethylenethiophosphoramine, Busulfan, Carmustine, Lomustine, Streptozocin, Dacarbazine, and Temozolomide.

Antimetabolites (including folic acid antagonists, pyrimidine analogs, purine analogs and adenosine deaminase inhibitors): Methotrexate, 5-Fluorouracil, Floxuridine, Cytarabine, 6-Mercaptopurine, 6-Thioguanine, Fludarabine phosphate, Pentostatine, and Gemcitabine.

Natural products and their derivatives (including vinca alkaloid, antitumor antibiotics, enzymes, lymphokines and epipodophyllotoxins) : Vinblastine, Vincristine, Vindesine, Bleomycin, Dactinomycin, Daunorubicin, Doxorubicin, Epirubicin, Idarubicin, paclitaxel (paclitaxel is commercially available as Taxole and is described in more detail below in the subsection entitled"Microtubule Affecting Agents"), Mithramycin, Deoxyco-formycin, Mitomycin-C, L-Asparaginase, Interferons (especially IFN-a), Etoposide, and Teniposide.

Hormones and steroids (including synthetic analogs): 17a-Ethinylestradiol, Diethylstilbestrol, Testosterone, Prednisone, Fluoxymesterone, Dromostanolone propionate, Testolactone, Megestrolacetate, Tamoxifen, Methylprednisolone, Methyl- testosterone, Prednisolone, Triamcinolone, Chlorotrianisene, Hydroxyprogesterone,

Aminoglutethimide, Estramustine, Medroxyprogesteroneacetate, Leuprolide, Flutamide, Toremifene, Zoladex.

Synthetics (including inorganic complexes such as platinum coordination complexes) : Cisplatin, Carboplatin, Hydroxyurea, Amsacrine, Procarbazine, Mitotane, Mitoxantrone, Levamisole, and Hexamethylmelamine.

Methods for the safe and effective administration of most of these chemotherapeutic agents are known to those skilled in the art. In addition, their administration is described in the standard literature. For example, the administration of many of the chemotherapeutic agents is described in the"Physicians'Desk Reference" (PDR), e. g. , Physician's Desk Reference, 57th edition, 2003, Thompson PDR at Montvale, NJ 07645-1742, USA; the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto.

As used herein, a microtubule affecting agent is a compound that interferes with cellular mitosis, i. e., having an anti-mitotic effect, by affecting microtubule formation and/or action. Such agents can be, for instance, microtubule stabilizing agents or agents that disrupt microtubule formation.

Microtubule affecting agents useful in the invention are well known to those of skill in the art and include, but are not limited to allocolchicine (NSC 406042), Halichondrin B (NSC 609395), colchicine (NSC 757), colchicine derivatives (e. g. , NSC 33410), dolastatin 10 (NSC 376128), maytansine (NSC 153858), rhizoxin (NSC 332598), paclitaxel (Taxolo, NSC 125973), Taxol''derivatives (e. g. , derivatives (e. g., NSC 608832), thiocolchicine (NSC 361792), trityl cysteine (NSC 83265), vinblastine sulfate (NSC 49842), vincristine sulfate (NSC 67574), epothilone A, epothilone, and discodermolide (see Service, (1996) Science, 274: 2009) estramustine, nocodazole, MAP4, and the like. Examples of such agents are also described in the scientific and patent literature, see, e. g., Bulinski (1997) J. Cell Sci. 110: 3055-3064; Panda (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94: 10560-10564; Muhlradt (1997) Cancer Res. 57: 3344- 3346; Nicolaou (1997) Nature 387: 268-272; Vasquez (1997) Mol. Biol. Cell. 8: 973- 985; Panda (1996) J. Biol. Chem. 271: 29807-29812.

Particularly preferred agents are compounds with paclitaxel-like activity. These include, but are not limited to paclitaxel and paclitaxel derivatives (paclitaxel-like compounds) and analogues. Paclitaxel and its derivatives are available commercially.

In addition, methods of making paclitaxel and paclitaxel derivatives and analogues are

well known to those of skill in the art (see, e. g. , U. S. Patent Nos: 5,569, 729; 5,565, 478; 5,530, 020; 5,527, 924; 5,508, 447; 5,489, 589; 5,488, 116; 5,484, 809 ; 5,478, 854; 5,478, 736; 5,475, 120; 5,468, 769; 5,461, 169; 5,440, 057; 5,422, 364; 5,411, 984; 5,405, 972; and 5,296, 506).

More specifically, the term"paclitaxel"as used herein refers to the drug commercially available as Taxole (NSC number: 125973). Taxons inhibits eukaryotic cell replication by enhancing polymerization of tubulin moieties into stabilized microtubule bundles that are unable to reorganize into the proper structures for mitosis. Of the many available chemotherapeutic drugs, paclitaxel has generated interest because of its efficacy in clinical trials against drug-refractory tumors, including ovarian and mammary gland tumors (Hawkins (1992) Oncology, 6: 17-23, Horwitz (1992) Trends Pharmacol. Sci. 13: 134-146, Rowinsky (1990) J. Natl. Canc.

Inst 82 : 1247-1259).

Additional microtubule affecting agents can be assessed using one of many such assays known in the art, e. g. , a semiautomated assay which measures the tubulin-polymerizing activity of paclitaxel analogs in combination with a cellular assay to measure the potential of these compounds to block cells in mitosis (see Lopes (1997) Cancer Chemother. Pharmacol. 41: 37-47).

Generally, activity of a test compound is determined by contacting a cell with that compound and determining whether or not the cell cycle is disrupted, in particular, through the inhibition of a mitotic event. Such inhibition may be mediated by disruption of the mitotic apparatus, e. g. , disruption of normal spindle formation. Cells in which mitosis is interrupted may be characterized by altered morphology (e. g., microtubule compaction, increased chromosome number, etc.).

Compounds with possible tubulin polymerization activity can be screened in vitro. In a preferred embodiment, the compounds are screened against cultured WR21 cells (derived from line 69-2 wap-ras mice) for inhibition of proliferation and/or for altered cellular morphology, in particular for microtubule compaction. In vivo screening of positive-testing compounds can then be performed using nude mice bearing the WR21 tumor cells. Detailed protocols for this screening method are described by Porter (1995) Lab. Anim. Sci., 45 (2): 145-150.

Other methods of screening compounds for desired activity are well known to those of skill in the art. Typically such assays involve assays for inhibition of

microtubule assembly and/or disassembly. Assays for microtubule assembly are described, for example, by Gaskin et a/. (1974) J. Mo/ec. Biol., 89: 737-758. U. S.

Patent No. 5,569, 720 also provides in vitro and in vivo assays for compounds with paclitaxel-like activity.

Methods for the safe and effective administration of the above-mentioned microtubule affecting agents are known to those skilled in the art. In addition, their administration is described in the standard literature. For example, the administration of many of the chemotherapeutic agents is described in the"Physicians'Desk Reference" (PDR), e. g. , 1996 edition (Medical Economics Company, Montvale, NJ 07645-1742, USA); the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto.

The amount and frequency of administration of the compounds of formula IA and the chemotherapeutic agents and/or radiation therapy will be regulated according to the judgment of the attending clinician (physician) considering such factors as age, condition and size of the patient as well as severity of the disease being treated. A dosage regimen of the compound of formula IA can be oral administration of from 10 mg to 2000 mg/day, preferably 10 to 1000 mg/day, more preferably 50 to 600 mg/day, in two to four (preferably two) divided doses, to block tumor growth. Intermittant therapy (e. g. , one week out of three weeks or three out of four weeks) may also be used.

The chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation therapy can be administered according to therapeutic protocols well known in the art. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the administration of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation therapy can be varied depending on the disease being treated and the known effects of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation therapy on that disease. Also, in accordance with the knowledge of the skilled clinician, the therapeutic protocols (e. g., dosage amounts and times of administration) can be varied in view of the observed effects of the administered therapeutic agents (i. e., antineoplastic agent or radiation) on the patient, and in view of the observed responses of the disease to the administered therapeutic agents.

In the methods of this invention, a compound of formula IA is administered concurrently or sequentially with a chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation. Thus, it is not necessary that, for example, the chemotherapeutic agent and the compound of

formula IA, or the radiation and the compound of formula IA, should be administered simultaneously or essentially simultaneously. The advantage of a simultaneous or essentially simultaneous administration is well within the determination of the skilled clinician.

Also, in general, the compound of formula IA and the chemotherapeutic agent do not have to be administered in the same pharmaceutical composition, and may, because of different physical and chemical characteristics, have to be administered by different routes. For example, the compound of formula IA may be administered orally to generate and maintain good blood levels thereof, while the chemotherapeutic agent may be administered intravenously. The determination of the mode of administration and the advisability of administration, where possible, in the same pharmaceutical composition, is well within the knowledge of the skilled clinician. The initial administration can be made according to established protocols known in the art, and then, based upon the observed effects, the dosage, modes of administration and times of administration can be modified by the skilled clinician.

The particular choice of a compound of formula IA, and chemo-therapeutic agent and/or radiation will depend upon the diagnosis of the attending physicians and their judgement of the condition of the patient and the appropriate treatment protocol.

The compound of formula IA, and chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation may be administered concurrently (e. g. , simultaneously, essentially simultaneously or within the same treatment protocol) or sequentially, depending upon the nature of the proliferative disease, the condition of the patient, and the actual choice of chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation to be administered in conjunction (i. e. , within a single treatment protocol) with the compound of formula or IA.

If the compound of formula IA, and the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation are not administered simultaneously or essentially simultaneously, then the initial order of administration of the compound of formula IA, and the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation, may not be important. Thus, the compound of formula IA may be administered first, followed by the administration of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation; or the chemo-therapeutic agent and/or radiation may be administered first, followed by the administration of the compound of formula IA. This alternate administration may be repeated during a single treatment protocol. The determination of the order of administration, and the number of

repetitions of administration of each therapeutic agent during a treatment protocol, is well within the knowledge of the skilled physician after evaluation of the disease being treated and the condition of the patient.

For example, the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation may be administered first, especially if it is a cytotoxic agent, and then the treatment continued with the administration of the compound of formula IA followed, where determined advantageous, by the administration of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation, and so on until the treatment protocol is complete.

Thus, in accordance with experience and knowledge, the practicing physician can modify each protocol for the administration of a component (therapeutic agent-- i. e. , the compound of formula IA, chemotherapeutic agent or radiation) of the treatment according to the individual patient's needs, as the treatment proceeds.

The attending clinician, in judging whether treatment is effective at the dosage administered, will consider the general well-being of the patient as well as more definite signs such as relief of disease-related symptoms, inhibition of tumor growth, actual shrinkage of the tumor, or inhibition of metastasis. Size of the tumor can be measured by standard methods such as radio-logical studies, e. g. , CAT or MRI scan, and successive measurements can be used to judge whether or not growth of the tumor has been retarded or even reversed. Relief of disease-related symptoms such as pain, and improvement in overall condition can also be used to help judge effectiveness of treatment.

BIOLOGICAL EXAMPLES The compounds of the present invention are useful in the treatment of CXC- chemokine mediated conditions and diseases. This utility is manifested in their ability to inhibit IL-8 and GRO-a chemokine as demonstrated by the following in vitro assays.

Receptor Binding Assays: CXCR1 SPA Assav For each well of a 96 well plate, a reaction mixture of 10 eLg hCXCR1-CHO overexpressing membranes (Biosignal) and 200 pg/well WGA-SPA beads (Amersham) in 100 pI was prepared in CXCR1 assay buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.8, 2 mM Cal2, 1 mM MgCI2, 125 mM NaCI, 0. 1 % BSA) (Sigma). A 0.4 nM stock of ligand, [1251]-IL-8 (NEN) was prepared in the CXCR1 assay buffer. 20X stock solutions of test compounds were prepared in DMSO (Sigma). A 6 X stock solution of IL-8 (R&D) was prepared in CXCR2 assay buffer. The above solutions were added to a 96-well assay plate (PerkinElmer) as follows : 10 lli test compound or DMSO, 40 Ll CXCR1 assay buffer or IL-8 stock, 100 gl of reaction mixture, 50 ; of ligand stock (Final [Ligand] = 0. 1 nM). The assay plates were shaken for 5 minutes on plate shaker, then incubated for 8 hours before cpm/well were determined in Microbeta Trilux counter (PerkinElmer). % Inhibition of Total binding-NSB (250 nM IL-8) was determined for IC50 values.

Alternative CXCR1 SPA Assay Protocol using CXCR1-expressing membranes from Biosianal Packard For each 50 lli reaction, a working stock of 0. 25 g/t hCXCRI-CHO over- expressing membranes with a specific activity of 0.05 pmol/mg (Biosignal Packard) and 25 µg/µl WGA-SPA beads (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences) was prepared in CXCR1 assay buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.8, 0.1 mM Cal2, 1mM MgCI2, 100 mM NaCI) (Sigma). This mixture was incubated on ice for 30 minutes and then centrifuged at 2500 rpm for 5 minutes. The beads and membranes were resuspended in CXCR1 assay buffer to the same concentrations as in the original mixture. A 0.125 nM stock of ligand, [125l]-IL-8 (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences), was prepared in the CXCR1 assay buffer. Test compounds were first serially diluted by half-logs in DMSO (Sigma) and then diluted 20-fold in CXCR1 assay buffer. The above solutions were added to a

Corning NBS (non-binding surface) 96-well assay plate as follows : 20 zizi test compound or 5% DMSO (final [DMSO] = 2%), 20 pLI of membranes and SPA bead mixture (Final [membrane] = 5 µg/reaction ; Final [SPA bead] = 500 µg/reaction), 10 fit of ligand stock (Final [1251-IL-8] = 0.025 nM). The assay plates were incubated for 4 hours before cpm/well were determined in a Microbeta Trilux counter (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences). IC50 values were quantified using nonlinear regression analysis in GraphPad Prism.

Alternative CXCR1 SPA Assay Protocol using CXCR1-expressing membranes from Euroscreen For each 50 ul reaction, a working stock of 0. 025 µg/µl hCXCR1-CHO over- expressing membranes with a specific activity of 3.47 pmol/mg (Euroscreen) and 5 µg/µl WGA-SPA beads (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences) was prepared in CXCR1 assay buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.8, 2.0 mM Cal2, 1mM MgCl2, 125 mM NaCI) (Sigma).

This mixture was incubated on ice for 5 minutes. A 0.125 nM stock of ligand, [1251]-lL- 8 (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences), was prepared in the CXCR1 assay buffer. Test compounds were first serially diluted by half-logs in DMSO (Sigma) and then diluted 13. 3-fold in CXCR1 assay buffer. The above solutions were added to a Corning NBS (non-binding surface) 96-well assay plate as follows : 20 ll test compound or 7.5% DMSO (final [DMSO] = 3%), 20 ul of membranes and SPA bead mixture (Final [membrane] = 0.5 ig/reaction ; Final [SPA bead] = 100 µg/reaction), 10 111 of ligand stock (Final [1251-IL-8] = 0.025 nM). The assay plates were incubated for 4 hours before cpm/well were determined in a Microbeta Trilux counter (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences). IC50 values were quantified using nonlinear regression analysis in GraphPad Prism.

For the CXCR1 assay, the compounds of Examples 1 to 6 had a Ki within the range of 345 nM to 25 pM. The compound of Example 6 had a Ki of 345 nM.

CXCR2 SPA Assay For each well of a 96 well plate, a reaction mixture of 4 pg hCXCR2-CHO overexpressing membranes (Biosignal) and 200 ug/well WGA-SPA beads (Amersham) in 100 pLI was prepared in CXCR2 assay buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 2 mM Cal2, 1mM MgCl2). A 0.4 nM stock of ligand, [1251]-IL-8 (NEN), was prepared

in the CXCR2 assay buffer. 20X stock solutions of test compounds were prepared in DMSO (Sigma). A 6 X stock solution of GRO-a (R&D) was prepared in CXCR2 assay buffer. The above solutions were added to a 96-well assay plate (PerkinElmer or Corning) as follows : 10 ul test compound or DMSO, 40 ul CXCR2 assay buffer or GRO-a stock, 100 pi of reaction mixture, 50 pi of ligand stock (Final [Ligand] = 0.1 nM). When 40 X stock solutions of test compounds in DMSO were prepared, then the above protocol was used except instead 5 pLI test compound or DMSO and 45 pl CXCR2 assay buffer were used. The assay plates were shaken for 5 minutes on a plate shaker, then incubated for 2-8 hours before cpm/well were determined in Microbeta Trilux counter (PerkinElmer). % Inhibition of total binding minus non-specific binding (250 nM Gro-a or 50 uM antagonist) was determined and IC50 values calculated. Compounds of this invention had an IC50 of <5pLM.

Alternative CXCR2 SPA Assay Protocol using the CXCR2 50 ni assay For each 50 pi reaction, a working stock of 0. 031 ug/pl hCXCR2-CHO over- expressing membranes with a specific activity of 0.4 pmol/mg (Biosignal Packard) and 2. 5 ug/pl WGA-SPA beads (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences) was prepared in CXCR2 assay buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 2.0 mM Cal2, 1 mM MgCI2) (Sigma). This mixture was incubated on ice for 5 minutes. A 0.50 nM stock of ligand, [125 I]-IL-8 (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences), was prepared in the CXCR2 assay buffer. Test compounds were first serially diluted by half-logs in DMSO (Sigma) and then diluted 13. 3-fold in CXCR2 assay buffer. The above solutions were added to a Corning NBS (non-binding surface) 96-well assay plate as follows : 20 pI test compound or 7.5% DMSO (final [DMSO] = 3%), 20 pi of membranes and SPA bead mixture (final [membrane] = 0. 625 pg/reaction ; final [SPA bead] = 50 pg/reaction), 10 pi of ligand stock (final [1251-IL-8] = 0.10 nM). The assay plates were incubated for 2 hours before cpm/well were determined in a Microbeta Trilux counter (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences).

IC50 values were quantified using nonlinear regression analysis in GraphPad Prism.

Alternative CXCR2 SPA Assay Protocol using the CXCR2 200 n) assay For each 200 Ll reaction, a working stock of 0.02 µg/µl hCXCR2-CHO over- expressing membranes with a specific activity of 0.6 pmol/mg (Biosignal Packard) and 2 µg/µl WGA-SPA beads (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences) was prepared in CXCR2 assay buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 2.0 mM Cal2, 1 mM MgCI2) (Sigma). This mixture was incubated on ice for 5 minutes. A 0.40 nM stock of ligand, [125l]-IL-8 (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences), was prepared in the CXCR2 assay buffer. Test compounds were first serially diluted by half-logs in DMSO (Sigma) and then diluted 20-fold in CXCR2 assay buffer. The above solutions were added to a Corning NBS (non- binding surface) 96-well assay plate as follows : 50 pI test compound or 10% DMSO (final [DMSO] = 2.5%), 100 ul of membranes and SPA bead mixture (final [membrane] = 2 ug/reaction ; final [SPA bead] = 200 ug/reaction), 50 ul of ligand stock (final [1251-lL- 8] = 0.10 nM). The assay plates were incubated for 2 hours before cpm/well were determined in a Microbeta Trilux counter (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences). IC50 values were quantified using nonlinear regression analysis in GraphPad Prism.

For the CXCR2 assay, the compounds of Examples 1 to 6 had a Ki within the range of 7.6 nM to 51 nM. The compound of Example 2 had a Ki of 7.6 nM, and the compound of Example 6 had a Ki of 19 nM.

Calcium Fluorescence Assay (FLIPR) HEK 293 cells stably transfected with hCXCR2 and Gat/q were plated at 10,000 cells per well in a Poly-D-Lysine Black/Clear plate (Becton Dickinson) and incubated 48 hours at 5% C02, 37°C. The cultures were then incubated with 4 mM fluo-4, AM (Molecular Probes) in Dye Loading Buffer (1 % FBS, HBSS w. Ca & Mg, 20 mM HEPES (Cellgro), 2.5 mM Probenicid (Sigma) for 1 hour. The cultures were washed with wash buffer (HBSS w Ca, & Mg, 20 mM HEPES, Probenicid (2.5 mM) ) three times, then 100) J/weii wash buffer was added.

During incubation, compounds were prepared as 4X stocks in 0.4% DMSO (Sigma) and wash buffer and added to their respective wells in the first addition plate.

IL-8 or GRO-a (R&D Systems) concentrations were prepared 4X in wash buffer + 0. 1 % BSA and added to their respective wells in second addition plate.

Culture plate and both addition plates were then placed in the FLIPR imaging system to determine change in calcium fluorescence upon addition of compound and then ligand. Briefly, 50 pl of compound solutions or DMSO solution was added to respective wells and change in calcium fluorescence measured by the FLIPR for 1 minute. After a 3 minute incubation within the instrument, 50 Ll of ligand was then added and the change in calcium fluorescence measured by the FLIPR instrument for I minute. The area under each stimulation curve was determined and values used to determine % Stimulation by compound (agonist) and % Inhibition of Total Calcium response to ligand (0.3 nM IL-8 or GRO-a) for IC50 values of the test compounds.

Chemotaxis assays for 293-CXCR2 A chemotaxis assay is setup using Fluorblok inserts (Falcon) for 293-CXCR2 cells (HEK-293 cells overexpressing human CXCR2). The standard protocol used at present is as follows : 1. Inserts are coated with collagenlV (2ug/ml) for 2 hrs at 37°C.

2. The collagen is removed and inserts are allowed to air dry overnight.

3. Cells are labeled with 10uM calcein AM (Molecular Probes) for 2 hrs. Labeling is done in complete media with 2% FBS.

4. Dilutions of compound are made in minimal media (0. 1 % BSA) and placed inside the insert which is positioned inside the well of a 24 well plate. Within the well is IL-8 at a concentration of 0.25nM in minimal media. Cells are washed and resuspended in minimal media and placed inside the insert at a concentration of 50,000 cells per insert.

5. Plate is incubated for 2hrs and inserts are removed and placed in a new 24 well.

Fluorescence is detected at excitation=485 nM and emission=530 nM.

Cvtotoxicity Assays A cytotoxicity assay for CXCR2 compounds is conducted on 293-CXCR2 cells.

Concentrations of compounds are tested for ioxicity at high concentrations to determine if they may be used for further evaluation in binding and cell based assays.

The protocol is as follows : 1.293-CXCR2 cells are plated overnight at a concentration of 5000 cells per well in complete media.

2. Dilutions of compound are made in minimal media w/0. 1% BSA. Complete media is poured off and the dilutions of compound are added. Plates are incubated for 4, 24 and 48hrs. Cells are labeled with 10uM calcein AM for 15 minutes to determine cell viability. Detection method is the same as above.

Soft Agar Assay 10,000 SKMEL-5 cells/well are placed in a mixture of 1.2% agar and complete media with various dilutions of compound. Final concentration of agar is 0.6%. After 21 days viable cell colonies are stained with a solution of MTT (1 mg/ml in PBS).

Plates are then scanned to determine colony number and size. IC50 is determined by comparing total area vs. compound concentration.

CCR7 membrane preparation.

Ba/F3-CCR7 membranes were prepared as previously described (Hipkin et al., J. Biol. Chem. , 272,1997, 13869-76). Cells were pelleted by centrifugation, incubated in homogenization buffer (10 mM Tris-HCI, 5 mM EDTA, 3 mM EGTA, pH 7.6) and 1 zip PMSF for 30 min. on ice. The cells were then lysed with a Dounce homogenizer using stirrer type RZR3 polytron homogenizer (Caframo, Wiarton, Ont. ) with 12 strokes at 900 RPM. The intact cells and nuclei were removed by centrifugation at 500Xg for 5 min. The cell membranes in the supernatant were then pelleted by centrifugation at 100,000Xg for 30 min. The membranes were then resuspended in glygly buffer (20 mM glycylglycine, 1 mM MgCI2, 250 mM sucrose, pH 7.2), aliquote, quick frozen and stored at-80°C.

CCR7 [35SlGTPltS exchanqe assay.

The exchange of guanosine 5'- [y-3'S] triphospate ([35S] GTPyS, triethylammonium salt ; specific activity = 1250 Ci/mmol ; NEN Boston, MA) was measured using a scintillation proximity assay (SPA) as previously described (Cox, et. al., Mol. Pharmacol., 59,2001, 707-15). For each assay point, 2 pg of membrane was preincubated for 30 min at room temperature with 200 ug wheat germ agglutinin- coated SPA beads (WGA-SPA; Amersham, Arlington Heights, IL) in SPA binding buffer (50 mM HEPES, 10 mM MgCI2, 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCI, 0. 1% BSA, pH 7.6). The beads and membranes were transferred to a 96-well Isoplate (Wallac,

Gaithersburg, MD) and incubated with 10 tM guanosine 5'-diphosphate (GDP) in the presence or absence of 2 nM MIP-3 and/or compounds for 60 min at room temperature. The incubation continued for another 60 min. following the addition of 0.1 nM [35S] GTPyS. Membrane-bound jS] GTPyS was measured using a 1450 Microbeta Trilux counter (Wallac, Gaithersburg, MD).

The compound of Example 162 had an Ecso of 9. 5, uM.

Rat Carrageenan-Induced Thermal Hyperalgesia Male Sprague-Dawley rats (Charles River Laboratories; 150-200gm) can be maintained under normal housing and lighting conditions, with food and water supplied ad libitum. Each animal can be tested for its baseline paw withdrawal response to a heat source by placement of the animal into a plantar testing unit (Ugo Basile, Italy), in which a light source is moved under its paw and the time of withdrawal is measured. The animals can then be dosed orally with a compound of this invention, and then can be injected intraplantarly with 2-3 mg lambda carrageenan (FMC Colloids) in 100 ul of saline while under isofurane anesthesia. Three hours later, the animals can be re-measured for their withdrawal response to the heat source.

Plantar tissue can also be analyzed for myeloperoxidase levels as a surrogate for neutrophil infiltration.

General Process Scheme A general procedure for the preparation of compounds of formula IA is as follows: Step A o O \ i O rio su Rso\/S R / I MHz Cl OEt Step B 0 0 0 0 R50. S. R50 S R50 s R50 S", R50 s N CI OEt BN OH B-N N-A H H H O O -.. CI OEt A-N OH-N N-B H H H

Step A Following a similar procedure outlined in J. Org. Chem, V 48, No: 6, 1983, P 763-767, but using the R5°CH2SO2NH2 indicated, the desired isothiazoledioxide intermediate could be prepared.

Step B Compounds of this invention are prepared by condensing an amine (either A- NH2 or B-NH2) with the known isothiazoledioxide prepared according to the literature to give the isothiazoledioxide intermediate. Subsequent condensation of this intermediate with the commercially available or prepared amine (either A-NH2 or B- NH2) provides the desired chemokine antagonist. For Examples where R50 = C (O) oR13, saponification with heating and subsequent acidification provides the desired R50 = H compounds.

The invention disclosed herein is exemplified by the following preparations and examples which should not be construed to limit the scope of the disclosure.

Alternative mechanistic pathways and analogous structures may be apparent to those skilled in the art.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 1 3-Nitrosalicylic acid (500 mg, 2.7 mmol), DCC (563 mg) and ethyl acetate (10 mL) were combined and stirred for 10 min. (R)- (-)-2-pyrrolidinemethanol (0.27 mL) was added and the resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature overnight.

The solid was filtered and the filtrate washed with 1 N NaOH. The aqueous phase was acidified and extracted with EtOAc. The resulting organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the residue by preparative plate chromatography (silica gel, 5% MeOH/CH2CI2 saturated with AcOH) gave the product (338 mg, 46%, MH+ = 267).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2 Step A HO HO w, + HN. St'-' HON w 0 OH 0 OH 0 OH 0 OH Step B Horn 'NH2 O OH Step A 3-Nitrosalicylic acid (9.2 g), bromotripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBroP, 23 g) and N, N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mL) in anhydrous CH2CI2 (125 mL) were combined and stirred at 25°C for 30 min. (R)- (+)-3- pyrrolidinol (8.7 g) in CH2CI2 (25 mL) was added over 25 min and the resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was extracted with 1 M NaOH (aq) and the organic phase was discarded. The aqueous phase was acidified with 1 M HCI (aq), extracted with EtOAc, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford the crude product (7 g) which was used without further purification.

Step B The crude product from Step A above was stirred with 10% Pd/C (0.7 g) in MeOH (100 mL) under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite, the filtrate concentrated in vacuo, and the resulting residue purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 10% MeOH/CH2CI2 saturated with NH40H) to give the product (2.5 g, 41 %, MH+=223).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.1 To N-BOC-3- (amino) piperidine (0.5 g) dissolved in CH2CI2 (10 mL) was added

benzylisocyanate (3 mmol). After stirring for 2 hrs, amine scavenger resin (1.9 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred overnight, filtered, the resin back-washed with CH2CI2 and methanol, and the organics concentrated in vacuo. Stirring of the crude material in 4N HCI/dioxane (40 mL) for 2.5 hrs before concentrating in vacuo gave the title compound (41 %, MH+=369).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.2-2. 6 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 2.1 but using the isocyanate (or chloroformate) indicated in the Table below, the amines were obtained and used without further purification. Prep Amine Isocyanate Amine Ex. 2. 2 0 NH NC.,. NH H H 2. 3 0 N H w .,. N H HZN NCO H H H H H Ny tVH N N H H 2. 5 O p NH/'- NH H 2-6 4 CIH 2. 6 O .,.,-NH-"NCO H2N NH N N H H PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.7 To N-BOC-3- (amino) piperidine (5 mmol) dissolved in CH2CI2 (30 mL) was

added trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride (5 mmol) and the mixture was stirred overnight. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with CH2CI2 (10 mL) and treated with trifluoroacetic acid (10 mL). After stirring for 2 hr, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound (43%, MH+=233.1).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.8

Step A o o H02C \ N02 N \ N02 OH O OH H I N C02H Step B O 1 N O Y NO HO2C O OH 0) Y"T'N02 HOoC" ! "0 OH Step C ! 1 N NHS HOoC't' "0 OH

Step A 3-Nitrosalicylic acid (5 mmol) and N-hydroxysuccinimide (5 mmol) were added to a solution of 2% DMF/CH2CI2, followed by DCC (5 mmol). After stirring for 2 hr, the mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo and the residue used directly in Step B.

Step B The product from Step A above was suspended in DMF and to this was added morpholino-2-carboxylic acid HCI (5 mmol) in CH2CI2 (10 mL) /DMF (5 mL) and diisopropylethylamine (10 mmol). The mixture was stirred overnight, filtered, basified

with 1N NaOH (50 mL), washed with CH2CI2, acidified with 5N HCI and extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound which was used directly in Step C (MH+=296).

Step C Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2 Step B, but using the product from Step B above, the title compound was obtained (23%, MH+=267).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.9 H N C02H Step A t \eNeN-H Step B cozy N CIH N I N'N Ste C N N 1-Y N N02) 0. H N I NO NH2 O OH HOZC p OH Step A 2-Piperazinecarboxylic acid and 2-chloro-1, 3-pyrimidine were stirred with triethylamine and MeOH. After stirring overnight at reflux, the mixture was filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound which was used directly in Step B (MH+ = 209).

Step B Following a similar procedure as Preparative Example 2.8, Step B except using the product from Preparative Example 2.9 Step A above, the desired compound was obtained (41 %, Mu+ = 374).

Step C Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B, but using the product from Step B above, the desired compound was obtained (99%, MH+=344).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.10 Step A 0 \ N02 a oNO2 H02C v NO 0 rN N Step B \N'\N >--N N-H N coach HOoC Step C 0 NEN H N y NH2 NH2 H02C o

Step A Following a similar procedure as Preparative Example 2.8, Step A except using 3-nitrobenzoic acid, the desired compound was obtained and used directly in Step B.

Step B Following a similar procedure as Preparative Example 2.8, Step B except using the products from Preparative Example 2.9, Step A and Preparative Example 2.10, Step A, the desired compound was obtained (86%).

Step C Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B, but using the product from Step B above, the desired compound was obtained (67%, MH+=331).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.11 Step A l HO N w I N O Step B HO N. H

Step A N-Benzylpiperidone (2 g, HCI salt, hydrate) was stirred with THF (20 mL), concentrated to dryness, and placed under high vac. The residue was diluted in THF (20 mL), and methyllithium was added (2.5 eq of 1.6N in Et20) via syringe. After stirring for 3 hr, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water, extracted with CH2CI2, and dried over Na2SO4. Filtration and concentrating in vacuo gave the desired product (50%, MH+ = 205).

Step B Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B, but using the product from Step A above, the title compound was obtained (95%, MH+=116).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.12 Step A N \ Step B z-) P N . nez H'N 0 oC, N t3 Step C oC, NsH Step C _ H OU OH Step A To N-benzyl-N-methylamine (20 mmol) dissolved in acetone (50 mL) was added concentrated HCI (20 mmol), paraformaldehyde (30 mmol) and 2-propanol (2 mL). After stirring at reflux overnight, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water, basified to pH 14 and extracted with ether. The organic phase was dried

over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired product (98%) which was used directly in Step B.

Step B The product from Step A above (500 mg) was dissolved in MeOH (20 mL) and to this was added NaBH4 (50 mg). After stirring for 10 min, the solution was concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound which was used directly in Step C without purification.

Step C The product from Step B above was diluted with MeOH (20 mL) and to this was added AcOH (0.1 mL), a catalytic amount of Pd/C (10%) and the mixture stirred under H2 atmosphere (balloon) overnight. The mixture was filtered, 4N HCI in dioxane (1 mL) was added, and the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound that was used directly without purification.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.13 CI/ Step A HCI H < MeO2Cs, o OH Step B ¢ zon E (N +NH2 H02C o OH Step A Following a similar procedure as Preparative Example 2, Step A except using methyl glycinate, the desired ester was obtained. The mixture was poured into 200 mL of 1 N NaOH, then extracted with dichloromethane. The pH was adjusted to 1 and NaCI was added until saturation. After several hours, the resulting precipitate was filtered and washed with cold water to give the desired product (42%).

Step B Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2 Step B, but using the product from Step A above, the title compound was obtained (95%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.14 HCI/ Ste p A H N MeOC N N02 H02C 0 OH

Step B zon NU2 H 2 O OH Step A Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2.13, Step A except using methyl N-methylglycinate, the desired product was obtained (18%).

Step B Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B, but using the product from Step A above, the title compound was obtained (95%, MH+ = 225).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 2.16

The above n-oxide (2g) was combined with H2NMe/H20 (15cm3) and heated to 140°C overnight. Potassium carbonate (1.3g) added and the mixture concentrated in vacuo. Extraction with EtOH and concentration of the filtrate in vacuo gave 1.56g of crude amine (MH+=125).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 3-10.50 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Examples 1-2 but using the carboxylic acid, amine, and coupling agent [DCC (Prep. Ex. 1) or PyBrop (Prep. Ex. 2)] listed in the Table below, the indicated amide products were obtained and used without further purification. Prep Carboxylic acid Amine Product Ex. 1. Coupling Agent 2. % yield 3. MH N02 ph Nu2 Hic ou ou 3. 181 2. 87, 86 3. 181 4 N02 N. HO2 OH/NH OH 0 OH 1. PyBroP 4 t $ NO2 \0 H >, N43l N H2 2. 49 3. 209 5 N02 NH3 ) =N02 ! H02C H2N 0 OH 1. PyBroP 2. 95 3. 153 6-NH2 NO H02C OH H H N O OU 0 OH 1. PyBroP 2. 83 3. 167 PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 10.55 Alternative Procedure for Preparative Example 3 Step A

To the nitrosalicylic acid (3 g) dissolved dichloromethane (150 mL) at room temperature was added oxalyl chloride (4.3 mL) and DMF (0.01 eq. ). After stirring for one day the mixture was concentrated in a vacuum to give a semi solid which was used directly in step B.

Step B To the material from step A diluted in dichloromethane (50 mL) and cooled to 0° C was added dimethyl amine in THF (2N solution, 24.6 mL) and triethylamine (4 eq. ). After stirring for 24 hours at room temperature the mixture was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with 1 M sodium hydroxide (30 mL) and after a half hour was washed with dichloromethane. The aqueous phase was acidified with 6M HCI (aq), extracted with dichloromethane and the organic phase was washed with water, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to give the title compound (3.2 g, 93%).

Step C

A mixture of the product from step B above (6 g), 10% Pd/C (0.6 g), and EtOH (80 mL) was stirred in a parr shaker under hydrogen (40 psi) at room temperature for 2 days. Filtration through celite and concentration in vacuo afforded the title product (5.1 g, 99%, MH+ = 181).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 11 Step A (. I HO2CJf Step OH OH OH O OH Step B 3= Step C 1) f$H2 'i w Np2' H2 O OH O OH Step A Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 1 except using dimethylamine (2M in THF, 33 mL) and 5-methylsalicylic acid (5 g), the desired product was prepared (6.5 g).

Step B Nitric acid (0.8 mL) in H2SO4 was added to a cooled (-20°C) suspension of the product from Step A above (3 g) in H2SO4 (25 mL). The mixture was treated with 50% NaOH (aq) dropwise, extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a crude solid (2.1 g, 44%, MH+ = 225).

Step C The product was prepared in the same manner as described in Step B of Preparative Example 2 (0. 7 g, 99%, MH+ = 195).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 11.1

Step A The above amine was reacted with the acid using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step A to yield the desired amide (54%).

Step B Na2S204 (1.22g) was dissolved in water (4ml) followed by the addition of NH3/H2O (300ul). The solution ws then added to the product from Step A (200 mg) in dioxane (4ml) and stirred for 30min. The crude material was purified via flash column chromatography (CH2CI2/MeOH, 20: 1) to give 100mg of product (56%, MH+=251).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 11.2

Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 11.1, Steps A and B, but using N-methylmethoxylamine, the title compound was obtained (86%, MH+=181).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 11. 10

Step A Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 1, but using N-hydroxysuccinimide and 2% DMF in CH2CI2, the desired amide was obtained (33%, MH+=297).

Step B Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step B, the amine was prepared (99%, MH+=267).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 11. 11-11. 18 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Examples 11.11 but using the carboxylic acid, amine, and coupling agent DCC indicated, the indicated amide products were obtained and used without further purification. Prep Carboxylic Amine Product 1. % Yield Ex. acid 2. MH+ 11. 11 n} n 1. 45, 92 OH \ N NHZ 2. 310. 0 H02C N OH 0 OH oh H 11. 12 N i'I. 45, 95 \/N I NH 2. 247. 2 z OH CIH. H2N PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 12

HO 4 Step A N No2 Nos O OH O OH I Step B | \ Step C N02 N2 O OH O OMe CN CN Step D Step E N N02 N02 O OMe O OH

CN Step F /NH\ 0 OH O OH Step A Following a similar procedure as described in Preparative Example 2 Step A except using dimethylamine in place of R- (+)-3-pyrrolidinol, the desired product was prepared.

Step B The product from step A above (8 g) was combined with iodine (9.7 g), silver sulfate (11.9 g), EtOH (200 mL) and water (20 mL) and stirred overnight. Filtration, concentration of the filtrate, re-dissolution in CH2CI2 and washing with 1 M HCI (aq) gave an organic solution which was dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product (7.3 g, 57%, MH+ = 337).

Step C The product from Step B above (3.1 g) was combined with DMF (50 mL) and Mel (0.6 mL). NaH (60% in mineral oil, 0.4 g) was added portionwise and the mixture was stirred overnight. Concentration in vacuo afforded a residue which was diluted with CH2CI2, washed with 1M NaOH (aq), dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification through a silica gel column (EtOAc/Hex, 1: 1) gave the desired compound (1.3 g, 41 %, MH+ = 351).

Step D The product from Step D above (200 mg), Zn (CN) 2 (132 mg), Pd (PPh3) 4 (130 mg) and DMF (5 mL) were heated at 80°C for 48 hrs, then cooled to room temperature and diluted with EtOAc and 2M NH40H. After shaking well, the organic extract was dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered, concentrated in vacuo and purified by preparative plate chromatography (Silica, EtOAc/Hex, 1: 1) to give the desired compound (62 mg, 44%, MH+ = 250).

Step E BBr3 (1.3 mL, 1 M in CH2CI2) was added to a CH2CI2 solution (5 mL) of the product from step D above (160 mg) and stirred for 30 min. The mixture was diluted with water, extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound (158 mg, MH+ = 236).

Step F A mixture of the product from step E above (160 mg), platinum oxide (83%, 19 mg), and EtOH (20 mL) was stirred under hydrogen (25-40 psi) for 1.5 hr. Filtration through celite and concentration in vacuo afforded the product (165 mg, MH+ = 206).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 12.1 Step A N Step B w I NH 0 OH O, 0 O O N Step C N i 0 OH 0 OH O H N02 NH2 O OH Step A Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step A except using 3-(methylaminomethyl) pyridine and 3-nitrosalicylic acid, the desired compound was prepared (41 %).

Step B The compound from Step A above (0.3 g) was diluted with chloroform (15 mL) and stirred with mCPBA (0.4 g) for 2 hr. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 10% MeOH/CH2CI2) gave the pyridyl N-oxide (0.32 g, 100%, MH = 303.9).

Step C Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 11.1, Step B, but using the product from Step B above, the desired compound was obtained (15%, MH+=274).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 12.2 Step A O OH O OH 0 OH 0 OH O OH O OH Step B '_NH2 O OH Step A 3-Nitrosalicylic acid (4 g) in MeOH (100 mL) and concentrated H2SO4 (1 mL) were stirred at reflux overnight, concentrated in vacuo, diluted with CH2CI2, and dried over Na2SO4. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 5% MeOH/CH2CI2) gave the methyl ester (2.8 g, 65%).

Step B Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B, but using the product from Step A above, the desired compound was obtained (95%, MH+=167.9).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 12.3 To morpholine-2-carboxilic acid (200mg) in EtOH (40mL) at 0°C was added acetyl chloride (3mL) and the mixture was stirred at reflux overnight. Concentration in vacuo, dilution with CH2Ci2 and washing with NaHCO3 (aq) gave the title compound (99%, MH+ = 160.1).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 12.4

To N-Boc morpholine-2-carboxylic acid (2g) in THF (5ml) at 0°C was added a solution of borane. THF complex (1 N, 10. 38ml) and the mixture was stirred for 30min at 0°C, and for 2hr at room temperature. Water (200ml) was added to the reaction and the mixture extracted with CH2CI2, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to give 490mg of product (26%). The product was then stirred in 4N HCI/dioxane to give the amine salt.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13 HO Step A Dz O OH O OH Step B, ra3 Step C a o OH o OH O OH'\ N°2 O oh 0 OH o OH Step D > NH2 O OH

Step A Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 1 except using dimethylamine (2M in THF, 50 mL) and 4-methylsalicylic acid (15 g), the desired compound was prepared (6.3 g, 35%).

Step B The product from Step A above (1.5 g) was combined with iodine (2.1 g), NaHC03 (1.1 g), EtOH (40 mL) and water (10 mL) and stirred overnight. Filtration, concentration of the filtrate, re-dissolution in CH2CI2 and washing with 1 M HCI (aq) gave an organic solution which was dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by flash column chromatography (silica gel, 0.5- 0.7% MeOH/CH2CI2) gave the product (0.5 g, 20%, MH+ = 306).

Step C Nitric acid (3.8 mL) in AcOH (10 mL) was added to the product from Step B above (0.8 g) and the mixture was stirred for 40 min. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as an orange solid (0.8 g, 92%, MH+ = 351).

Step D A mixture of the product from step C above (800 mg), 10% Pd/C (100 mg), and EtOH/MeOH (40 mL) was stirred in a parr shaker under hydrogen (45 psi) for 1.5 hr.

Filtration through celite and concentration in vacuo afforded the title product after purification by preparative plate chromatography (Silica, 10% MeOH/CH2CI2, saturated with NH40H) to give the product (92 mg, 22%, MH+ = 195).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.1 Br Br Step A Step B H O I -N l- 04 04 0'0 OH OH Br Br Step C \N I \N I N I/--N/ NH2 OH OH

Step A Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step A except using dimethylamine (2M in THF, 23 mi) and 5-bromosalicylic acid (5g), the desired compound was prepared (4.2g, 75%, MH+=244).

Step B Nitric acid (1 Oml) in AcOH (100ml) was added to the product from Step A above (2g) and the mixture was stirred for 20 min. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with CH2C12, dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a yellow solid (1.9g, 80%, MH+=289).

Step C The product from Step B above (1.9g) was partially dissolved in EtOH (50ml).

Conc HCI in EtOH (5ml in 40ml), followed by SnCI2. 2H2O (5.74g) was added and stirred at room temperature overnight. The crude reaction was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with CHzCtzand washed with NaHC03, dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a solid (185mg, 9%, MH+=259).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.2 cl ci Step A Step B HO I -- N I // O O OH OH n C) Step C I \N 11 N I N/ N02 NH2 OH OH OH

Step A Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step A, except using dimethylamine (2M in THF, 29 ml) and 5-chlorosalicylic acid (5g), the desired compound was prepared (4.5g, 78%, MH+=200).

Step B Nitric acid (10mut) in AcOH (100mi) was added to the product from Step A above (2g) and the mixture was stirred for 20 min. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a solid (2.2g, 88%, MH+=245).

Step C The product from Step B above (2.2g) was partially dissolved in EtOH (50ml).

Conc HCI in EtOH (5ml in 40mut), followed by SnCI2. 2H20 (7. 01 g) was added and stirred at room temperature overnight. The crude reaction was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with CH2CI2 and neutralized with NaOH. The entire emulsion was filtered though celite, the layers were separated and the organic layer was dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give a solid (540mg, 22%, MH+=215).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.3 Step A Step B OH OH 'i _N02 O OH O Step C I Step D N 0 OMe Oye OYE Br 0 !"OH OMe \N > \NW OMe

Step A 3-Nitrosalicylic acid (10g), PyBroP (20.52g), and DIEA (28ml) in anhydrous CH2CI2 (200m1) were combined and stirred at room temperature for 10 min.

Dimethylamine (2M in THF, 55ml) was added and let the reaction stir over the weekend. The mixture was extracted with 1 N NaOH (aq) and the organic phase was discarded. The aqueous phase was acidified with 1 N HCI (aq), extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The oil was taken up in ether and a solid crashed out, triterated in ether to give 4.45g of a solid (39%, MH+=211).

Step B The product from Step A (2.99g), K2CO3 (9.82g), and iodomethane (8. 84ml) were combined in acetone and heated to reflux overnight. The reaction was filtered and concent ated in vacuo. The oil was taken up in CH2CI2 and washed with 1 N NaOH, dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 3.3g of an oil (99%, MH+=225).

Step C The crude product from Step B (3.3g) was stirred with 10% Pd/C (350mg) in EtOH (50ml) under a hydrogen gas atmosphere at 20psi overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 2.34 g of a solid (85%, MH+=195).

Step D The product from Step C (469mg) was dissolved in AcOH (6ml). 1.95M Br2 in AcOH (1. 23ml) was added dropwise to the reaction and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. 50% NaOH was added to the reaction at 0°C and the mixture was extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by preparative plate chromatography (Silica, 5% MeOH/CH2CI2) to give the desired product (298mg, 23%, MH+=273).

Step E BBr3 (2. 14ml, 1 M in CH2CI2) was added to a CH2CI2 solution (8ml) of the product from Step D above (290mg) and stirred overnight. A solid formed and was filtered, taken up in MeOH/CH2CI2 and purified by preparative plate chromatography (Silica, 5% MeOH/CH2CI2) to give the desired product (137mg, 49%, MH+=259).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.4 0 step A \ _ /N XNH2 OMe 0) OMe OMe Step B \, 7/, 10-N l /0 NH2 OH

Step A To the product from Preparative Example 13.3 Step D (200mg) was added phenylboronic acid (98mg), PdCl2 (PPh3) 2 (51 mg), and Na2CO3 (155mg) in THF/H20 (4ml/1 ml). The solution was heated at 80°C overnight. EtOAc was added to reaction and washed with 1 N NaOH. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by preparative plate chromatography (5% MeOH/CH2CI2) to give 128mg of an oil (65%, MH+=271).

Step B Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 13.3 Step E and using the product from Step A above, the desired compound was prepared (0.1 g, 69%, MH+=257.1).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.5-13. 7 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example13. 4 but using the boronic acid from the Preparative Example indicated in the Table below, the amine products were obtained. Prep Boronic Acid Product 1. Yield (%) Ex. 2. MH 13. 5 N 1. 15% -un/ 2. 258 I I B (OH) 2 H NH2 0 oh 13. 6CFs1. 32% CF3 2. 325 B (OH) 2 f) 1--N NH2 0 OH O OH PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.8 Step A H 11 Step B Nec OH N N-N OH Step C H I N I/NO N I/NH N XNO2 N XNH2

Step A 2-Cyanophenol (500mg), sodium azide (819mg), and triethylamine hydrochloride (1.73g) were combined in anhydrous toluene and heated to 99°C overnight. After the reaction cooled down, product was extracted with H2O. Aqueous layer was acidified with conc. HCI dropwise giving a precipitate, which was filtered to give the product (597mg, 87%, MH+=163).

Step B Nitric acid (0. 034moi) in AcOH (5ml) was added to the product from Step A above (100mg) in AcOH and the mixture was allowed to stir for 1 hr. CH2CI2 and H20 were added to reaction. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give an oil. Trituration in ether gave the product as a solid (12mg, 9%, MH+=208).

Step C The product from step C (56mg) was stirred with 10% Pd/C (20mg) in EtOH/MeOH (15mut) under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 29mg of a solid (62%, MH+=178).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.9

The amine was prepared following the procedure disclosed in WO 01/68570, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.10

The amine was prepared following the procedure disclosed in WO 01/68570, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.11 0 Step A 0 0 Step B F3 0 N) /Ph StepC,-H'P StepD CFs, CIH. HN \/ nez N Ph

Step A Following the procedure described in Preparative Example 88.2, Step A, the ketone was prepared (6.4g, 36%).

Step B To a solution of ketone (1g) and 2-R-methylbenzylamine (0. 73ml) in anhydrous toluene (20mi) was added 1 N TiC14 in toluene (3ml) at room temperature for 1. 5hrs.

The precipitate was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified via flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 18/1) to give 800mg of product (71 %).

Step C The imine from above (760mg) and DBU (800ul) were stirred without solvent for 4hr. The crude reaction was concentrated in vacuo and purified via flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 8/1) to give 600mg of product (79%).

Step D The imine from Step C (560mg) was dissolved in ether (8ml). 3N HCI (5ml) added and let stir at room temperature overnight. The ether layer was separated and concentrated in vacuo to give 400mg of the amine hydrochloride product (93%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.12 The title compound was prepared similarly as in Preparative Example 13.11, but using the 2-S-methylbenzylamine instead of 2-R-methylbenzylamine (69%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.13 0 OH 0 Step A Step B F3C"j F, C Pu pu Step E Step C Y, CIH. HAN N pu pu h Step A At room temperature, CsF (60mg) was added to a mixture of furfuraldehyde (1. 3ml) and TMS-CF3 (2.5g) and stirred at room temperature (24 h) and refluxed for another 12h. 3N HCI (40ml) was added and after 4hr, the mixture was extracted with

ether, washed with brine, dried over MgS04, and concentrated in vacuo to give the product (2.6g, 100%).

Step B To a solution of alcohol from above (2.6g) in CH2CI2 at room temperature was added Dess-Martin reagent (10g) portionwise and 1 drop of water. After stirring for 3hr at room temperature, 10% Na2S203 (60ml) was added and after stirring overnight, the solid was filtered off and the filtrate was extracted with CH2CI2. The organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Ether/hexane (1: 2; 30mut) was added to the residue, filtered, and filtrate concentrated in vacuo to give the product (2g, 78%).

Step C Following the procedures described in Preparative Example 13.11, Steps B, C and D, the amine salt was prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 13.15-13. 17 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.13, but using the prepared or commercially available aldehydes, the optically pure amine products in the Table below were obtained. Prep Aldehyde Amine Product Yield Ex. (%) 13. 15 34. 12 20 0 Fs O CF3 H O H 9 H2ND CL Cl PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.18

The title compound was prepared from trifluorophenylketone according to the procedures described in Preparative Example 13.11, Steps B, C, and D (68%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.19 0 0 0 Step A S Step B S Me Me HO Br MeO Br Me0 B Step C Q O O E Step E. N \S Step D, N \S HO NH2 Me O N=<P h Me O B r

Step A Methyl-3-hydroxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxylate (10.0 g, 42.2 mmol) was dissolved in 250 mL of acetone. Potassium carbonate (30.0 g, 217.4 mmol) was added followed by a solution of iodomethane (14.5 mL, 233.0 mmol). The mixture was heated to reflux and continued for 6 h. After cooled to room temperature, the mixture was filtered, the solid material was rinsed with acetone (-200 mL). The filtrate and rinsing were concentrated under reduced pressure to a solid, further dried on high vacuum, yielding 13.7 g (100%) of methyl-3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxylate (MH+ = 251.0).

Step B Methyl-3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxylate (13.7 g), available from step A, was dissolved in 75 mL of THF, and added with a 1.0 M sodium hydroxide aqueous solution (65 mL, 65.0 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. A 1.0 M hydrogen chloride aqueous solution was added dropwise to the mixture until pH was approximately 2. The acidic mixture was extracted with CH2CI2 (100 mL x 2,50 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (40 mL), dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated under reduced pressure to a solid, 10.0 g (100%, over two steps) of 3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxylic acid (MH+ 237.0).

Step C To a stirred solution of 3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxylic acid (6.5 g, 27.4 mmol) in 140 mL of CH2CI2, obtained from step B, was added bromo- tripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBrop, 12.8 g, 27.5 mmol), a 2.0 M solution of dimethyl amine in THF (34.5mL, 69.0 mmol), and diisopropylethyl amine (12.0 mL, 68.7 mmol). After 3 d, the mixture was diluted with 100 mL of CH2CI2, and washed with a 1.0 M sodium hydroxide aqueous solution (30 mL x 3) and brine (30 mL). The organic solution was dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to an oil.

This crude oil product was purified by flash column chromatography, eluting with CH2CI2-hexanes (1: 1, v/v). Removal of solvents afforded a solid, further dried on high vacuum, yielding 6.76 g (93 %) of N, N'-dimethyl-3-methoxy-4-bromo-2- thiophenecarboxamide (MH+ = 265.0, M+2 = 266.1).

Step D An oven dried three-neck round bottom flask was equipped with a refluxing condenser, charged sequentially with palladium acetate (95 mg, 0.42 mmol), (R) - BINAP (353 mg, 0.57 mmol), cesium carbonate (9.2 g, 28.33 mmol), and N, N'- dimethyl-3-methoxy-4-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxamide (3.74 g, 14.2 mmol, from step C). The solid mixture was flushed with nitrogen. Toluene (95 mL) was added to the solid mixture followed by benzophenone imine (3.6 mL, 21.5 mmol). The mixture was heated to reflux and continued for 10 h. A second batch of palladium acetate (95 mg, 0.42 mmol) and (R)-BINAP (353 mg, 0.57 mmol) in 5 mL of toluene was added.

Refluxing was continued for 14 h. The third batch of palladium acetate (30 mg, 0.13 mmol) and (R)-BINAP (88 mg, 0.14 mmol) was added, and reaction continued at 110°C for 24 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, diluted with ether (50 mL), filtered through a layer of Celite, rinsing with ether. The filtrate and rinsing were concentrated under reduced pressure to an oil, which was purified twice by flash column chromatography using CH2CI2 and CH2CI2-MeOH (200: 1) as eluent.

Removal of solvents afforded 4.1 g (79 %) of the amido-thiophene diphenylimine product as a solid (MH+ = 365.1).

Step E To a stirred solution of thiophene imine (5.09 g, 13.97 mmol), obtained from step D, in 140 mL of CH2CI2 at-78°C was added dropwise a 1.0 M solution of boron tribromide in CH2CI2. The mixture was stirred for 3 h while the temperature of the cooling bath was increased slowly from-78°C to-15°C. 100 mL of H20 was added, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min, then the two layers were separated. The organic layer (as A) was extracted with H20 (30 mL x 2). The aqueous layer and aqueous extracts were combined, washed with CH2CI2 (30 mL), and adjusted to pH-8 using a saturated NaHC03 aqueous solution. The neutralized aqueous solution was extracted with CH2Ci2 (100 mL x 3), the extracts were washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated under reduced pressure to a light yellow solid, 1.49 g of N, N'-dimethyl-3-hydroxy-4-amino-2-thiophenecarboxamide (first crop). The previous separated organic layer A and organic washing were combined, stirred with 30 mL of a 1.0 M HCI aqueous solution for 1 h. The two layers were separated, the aqueous layer was washed with CH2CI2 (30 mL) and adjusted to pH-8 using a saturated NaHC03 aqueous solution, and the separated organic layer and organic washing were combined as organic layer B. The neutralized aqueous solution was extracted with CH2CI2 (30 mL x 4), the extracts were washed with brine, dried by Na2SO4, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give 0.48g of a solid as the second crop of the titled product. Organic layer B from above was washed with brine, and concentrated to an oil, which was separated by preparative TLC (CH2CI2- MeOH = 50: 1) to afford 0.45 g of a solid as the third crop of the titled product. The overall yield of the product, N, N'dimethyl-3-hydroxy-4-amino-2- thiophenecarboxamide, is 2.32 g (89%) (MH+ = 187.0).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.20 IN) s Step A 0 s Step B 0 Step A S Step B S g Ph \/ Ph Ph Step A To the product from Preparative Example 13.19 Step D (1.56g) in CH2C12 (55moi) was added potassium carbonate (1.8g) followed by dropwise addition of

bromine (0. 45ml). After 5hr of mixing, water (100ml) was added to the reaction and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2, which was then washed with brine, saturated sodium bicarbonate, and brine again. The organic layer was dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified via flash column chromatography (CH2CI2) to yield 1.6g of product (83%).

Step B The product from above was reacted in the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19 Step C to give the amine.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13. 21 o o Step A S Step B \/N \ l MeO NP Me0 N=<Ph HO NH2 MeO N=< Ph Step A To the product from Preparative Example 13.20, Step A (300mg) in THF (7ml) at-78 °C was added a solution of n-BuLi (1.6M in hexanes, 0. 54ml). After 1 hr, iodomethane (0. 42ml) was added dropwise. After 3 hrs of stirring at-78 °C, the reaction was warmed to room temperature overnight. Saturated ammonium chloride and water were added to the reaction and extracted with CH2CI2. The organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by preparative plate chromatography (CH2CI2-MeOH = 70: 1 to 50: 1) to afford the product (111 mg, 43%).

Step B The product from above was reacted in the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step E to give the amine.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.22 0 0 0 Step A S Step B S CI j / MeO Ny MeO N<Ph HO NH2 Ph

Step A To the product from Preparative Example 13.19 (400mg), Step D in CH2CI2- pyridine (14mut) was added N-chlorosuccinimide (220mg). The mixture was stirred for 5hr and then diluted with CH2CI2 and washed with water, saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified via preparative plate chromatography (CH2CI2-MeOH = 50: 1) to give 180mg of product (64%).

Step B The product from above (274mg) was reacted in the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step E to give the amine (89mg, 58%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.23 o s Step A 0 s Step B 0 HO N N s Me0 H / (/ Br Me0 gr Me0 ber Ou O S O S Step C N Ph Step D N s MeO N-= HO NH2 Ph Step A To a stirred solution of acid (630mg) from Preparative Example 13.19, Step B in CH2CI2 (25ml) was added oxalyl chloride (235ul) followed by a catalytic amount of DMF (1 Ou !). The mixture was stirred for 1 hr, then potassium carbonate (1. 8g) was added followed by 3-amino-5-methylisoxazole (443mg). The reaction stirred overnight and was quenched with water (25ml). Layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by preparative plate chromatography (CH2CI2) to afford the product (580mg, 78%, MH+=317,319).

Step B The acid from the above (750mg) step was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.3, Step B to yield 625mg of product (80%, MH+=331).

Step C The product from above was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step D to yield 365mg of product (53%) Step D The product from above was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step E to give the amine product (MH+=254).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.25 OH X Step A-F Step B- - F F F N3 Step C o O han Step A To a solution of 2-methylfuran (1g) in ether (30moi) was added n-BuLi (5. 32moi) at-78°C. The reaction was warmed to room temperature and then refluxed at 38 °C for 1 hr. The reaction was cooled back down to-78°C where the furyl lithium was quenched with trifluorobutyraldehyde and let stir at room temperature overnight.

Saturated ammonium chloride added and extracted with ether. Purified via flash column chromatography to yield pure product (2g, 80%) Step B The azide was prepared using the procedure from Preparative Example 75.75, Step B and the alcohol (1g) from above and carried on crude to Step C below.

Step C The amine was prepared using the procedure from Preparative Example 75.75, Step C to yield 400mg of an oil (53%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.26 Step A OH Step B O O H C2F5 Step C Step A Perfluoroiodide (3. 6mut) was condensed at-78°C. Ether (125ml) was added followed by the methyllithium. lithiumbromide complex (1.5M in ether, 18. 4ml). After 15min, a solution of 5-methylfuraldehyde (2. 5mi) in ether was added dropwise. The reaction was warmed to-45 °C and let stir for 2hr. Saturated ammonium chloride (30ml) and water (30mi) were added and let stir at room temperature for 1 hr. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 5. 86g of product (100%).

Step B The alcohol from above was reacted to form the azide using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 75.75 Step B.

Step C The azide from above was reacted to form the racemic amine using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 75.75 Step C.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.27 0 OH Step A Step B -- H 0 Step C Step D r-nor- 925 stepE 925 C2Fs \ HO Sep E

Step A Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.26, Step A, the alcohol was prepared (100%).

Step B To a solution of the alcohol (500mg) from step A above in CH2CI2 (20ml) was added N-methyl-morpholine monohydrate (575mg) and a catalytic amount of tetrapropyl ammonium perruthenate (76mg). After 3hr, the mixture was diluted with hexane (10mi) and filtered through a silica pad, rinsing with hexane: CH2Cl2 (200ml).

The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 350mg of product (70.7%) Step C The ketone (1.19g) from Step B was dissolved in THF (9. 5mi) and cooled to 0 °C. A solution of S-methyl oxazoborolidine (1 M in toluene, 1 ml) followed by a solution of borane complexed with dimethylsulfide (9. 5moi, 2M in THF) was added to the solution. The mixture was stirred at 0 °C for 30min and continued at room temperature for 5hr. The mixture was cooled back down to 0 °C and methanol (15mol) was added dropwise to the mixture. After 30min, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give an oily residue.

The residue was dissolved in CH2CI2 and washed with 1 N HCI, water, and brine. Dried with Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was

purified via flash column chromatography (Hex/CH2C12, 1: 1) to afford 1.14g of an oil (67%).

Step D The alcohol (1.14g) from above was reacted to form the azide using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 75.75 Step B.

Step E The azide (1. 11g) from above was stirred with 10% Pd/C (280mg) in EtOH (40mi) under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction was filtered through celite, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 700mg of product (70%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.28 0 0 Step A Step B Step C \/\/ NO2 NHZ NMs2 N-OH NHz Step \/ NHMs NHMs NHMs Ms represents methanesulfonyl Step A To a stirred solution of 1-(2-thienyl)-1-propanone (3g) in acetic anhydride (6ml) at 0°C was added dropwise a solution of fuming nitric acid in acetic acid (2ml in 10ml).

After 30min, the reaction was warmed to room temperature and let stir for 5hrs where a solid precipitated out. Ice was added to the reaction and the solid was filtered. The solid was purified by flash column chromatography (Hex/CH2CI2, 3: 1 and 2: 1) to yield 800mg of desired product (20%).

Step B The above nitro-thiophene compound (278mg) was reduced using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step B to give 54mg of product (23%).

Step C The above amine (395mg), TEA (1ml) and methanesulfonylchloride (0. 5mi) were combined in CH2CI2 (35ml) and stirred at room temperature for 1 hr. The reaction was quenched with saturated sodium bicarbonate (15ml). The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford product (854mg, 100%).

Step D To the above product (854mg) in THF (25ml) was added dropwise a solution of tetrabutylammonium fluoride (1M in THF, 2. 8ml). The mixture was stirred overnight, then diluted with CH2CI2 (30ml), washed with ammonium chloride and brine, dried over over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford product (2.36g, >100%).

Step E The ketone (2.36g) above was reacted via the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 88.2, Step B to yield 547mg of product (86.6%).

Step F To the product from step E (310mg) in dimethoxyethane (12ml) was added dropwise a solution of LAH (1 M in ether, 3. 8mi). The mixture was heated to reflux overnight. The reaction was cooled to room temperature, Si02 was added as well as water (1 ml) dropwise and let stir for 15min. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentratred in vacuo. The crude product was purified by preparative plate chromatography (MeOH/CH2CI2, 15: 1) to give the amine product (40mg, 14%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.29 0 0 s s s 0 StepC Step A S \ I Step B ci-N O\ O\ O\ Step C Step E O O S O O S 0 \\s 0 s \-N Br-N nu StepE HO StepD HO °\ HO HO Step F S Ph Step G 0 O S v N/Ph.-N\ NH 0 NO

Step A To a solution of 3-methoxythiophene (3 g) in dichloromethane (175 mL) at- 78°C was added chlorosulfonic acid (8.5 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 15 min at-78°C and 1.5 h at room temp. Afterwards, the mixture was poured carefully into crushed ice, and extracted with dichloromethane. The extracts were washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered through a 1-in silica gel pad. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound (4.2 g).

Step B The product from Step A above (4.5 g) was dissolved in dichloromethane (140 mL) and added with triethylamine (8.8 mL) followed by diethyl amine in THF (2M, 21 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was washed with brine and saturated bicarbonate (aq) and brine again, dried over

sodium sulfate, filtered through a 1-in silica gel pad. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound (4.4 g).

Step C The product from Step B above (4.3 g) was dissolved in dichloromethane (125 mL) and cooled in a-78°C bath. A solution of boron tribromide (1.0 M in dichloromethane, 24.3 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred for 4 h while the temperature was increased slowly from-78°C to 10°C. H2O was added, the two layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted with dichloro-methane.

The combined organic layer and extracts were washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 3.96 g of the desired hydroxy-compound.

Step D The product from step C above (3.96 g) was dissolved in 125 mL of dichloromethane, and added with potassium carbonate (6.6 g) followed by bromine (2 mL). The mixture was stirred for 5 h at room temperature, quenched with 100 mL of H20. The aqueous mixture was addjusted to pH-5 using a 0.5N hydrogen chloride aqueous solution, and extracted with dichloromethane. The extracts were washed with a 10 % Na2S203 aqueous solution and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and filtered through a celite pad. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford 4.2 g of the desired bromo-compound.

Step E The product from Step D (4.2 g) was dissolved in 100 mL of acetone and added with potassium carbonate (10 g) followed by iodomethane (9 mL). The mixture was heated to reflux and continued for 3.5 h. After cooled to room temperature, the mixture was filtered through a Celite pad. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to a dark brown residue, which was purified by flash column chromatography eluting with dichloromethane-hexanes (1: 1, v/v) to give 2.7 g of the desired product.

Step F The product from step E (2.7 g) was converted to the desired imine compound (3 g), following the similar procedure to that of Preparative Example 13.19 step D.

Step G The imine product from step F (3 g) was dissolved in 80 mL of dichloromethane and cooled in a-78°C bath. A solution of boron tribromide (1.0 M in dichloromethane, 9.2 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 4.25 h from-78°C to 5°C. H20 (50 mL) was added, and the layers were separated.

The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer and extracts were combined, washed with brine, and concentrated to an oily residue. The residue was dissolved in 80 mL of methanol, stirred with sodium acetate (1.5 g) and hydroxyamine hydrochloride (0.95 g) at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture was poured into an aqueous mixture of sodium hydroxide (1.0 M aq, 50 mL) and ether (100 mL). The two layers were separated. The aqueous layer was washed with ether three times. The combined ether washings were re-extracted with H20 once. The aqueous layers were combined, washed once with dichloromethane, adjusted to pH- 6 using 3.0 M and 0.5 M hydrogen chloride aqueous solutions, and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic extracts were combined, washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo to give 1.2 g of desired amine compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 13.30-13. 32-A Following the procedures set forth in Example 13.29, but using commercially available amines, hydroxy-amino-thiophene products in the Table below were obtained. Prep Ex. Amine Product Yield (%) MH 13. 30 (Bn) 2NH 0 0 10% S Bn \/375. 1 Bn HO NH2 PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13. 33 0 0 O S S Step A S I Ste Et-N | Step C ce \ Bon HO O Bn. 0 Step C zu Step E S Step D 0 Et-N \ Br ET-NH Br Et-N Br \ \Bn 0 Bn HO Step F O S - Step G O/S S Ph Step H Et-N \ I Ph Et--N NH2 ZZ, \S NH2 O \

Step A 2-Chlorosulfonyl-3-methoxy-thiophene (4.0 g, 18.8 mmol), the product from Step A of Preparative Example 13.29 was converted to 3-methoxy-2-

ethylbenzylsulfonyl-thiophene (5.5 g, 94%, MH+ = 312.1) by using ethylbenzyi-amine, following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step B.

Step B The product from Step A above (5.5 g, 17.70 mmol) was demethylated following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step C. The alcohol product was obtained in 4.55 g (87%, MH+ = 298.0).

Step C The product from Step B above (4.55 g, 15.30 mmol) was brominated using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step D. The corresponding bromide was obtained in 4.85 g (84%).

Step D The bromo-alcohol from Step C above (4.84 g, 12.86 mmol) was methylated using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step E. The product was obtained in 4.82 g (96%).

Step E The product from Step D above (4.82 g, 12.36 mmol) was stirred with concentrated sulfuric acid (5 mL) at room temperature ro 3 h. Ice water (30 mL) was added to the mixture followed by CH2CI2 (50 mL). The aqueous mixture was adjusted to pH-6 using a 1.0 M NaOH aqueous solution. The layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (50 mL x 3). The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to a dark brown oil, which was purified by flash column chromatography, eluting with CH2CI2-hexanes (1: 1, v/v). Removal of solvents afforded 3.03 g (82%) of the debenzylated product (M+ = 300.0, M+2 = 302.0).

Step F The product from Step E (1.34 g, 4.45 mmol) was methylated using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step E. The desired product was obtained in 1.36 g (97%, M+ = 314.1, M+2 = 316.0).

Step G The product from Step F (1.36 g, 4.33 mmol) was converted to imine product (1.06 g, 55%, MH+ = 415. 1) using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step F.

Step H The imine product from Step G (1.06 g, 2.56 mmol) was converted to the desired hydroxy-amino thiophene compound (0.26 g, 43%) using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step G.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.34 0 0 0 0 , S S Step A Is s Step B s s Step C'N ; O / H3C0 N-p N-p N HO Step D | Step D Steps 0 0 0 '" y - y- y N ó N 0 N= 0 Br Ho Br NEN Step A 2-Chlorosulfonyl-3-methoxy-thiophene (3.8 g, 17.87 mmol), the product from step A of Preparative Example 13.29, was dissolved in 100 mL of CH2CI2 and 20 mL of pyridine. 3-Amino-5-methyl-isoxazole (3.5 g, 35.68 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred for 20 h at room temperature, diluted with 100 mL of CH2CI2, and washed with a 0.5 N HCI aqueous solution (50 mL x 2), H20 (50 mL), and brine (50 mL). The organic solution was dried with Na2SO4, and conentrated in vacuo to a brown oil. This oil was dissolved in 100 mL of CH2CI2, washed again with a 0.5 M HCI aqueous

solution (30 mL x 3) and brine. After dried over Na2SO4, the organic solution was concentrated in vacuo to a yellow solid, 4.48 g (91 %, MH+= 275.0) of the desired product.

Step B The product from Step A above (4. 48 g, 16.33 mmol) was dissolved in acetone (100 mL), added with potassium carbonate (5.63 g, 40. 80 mmol) and iodomethane (10.1 mL, 163.84 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h, diluted with 100 mL of hexanes and 50 mL of CH2CI2, and filtered through a 1-in silica gel pad, rinsing with CH2CI2. The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to give 4.23 g (90%, MH+= 289.0) of the desired product as a light yellow solid.

Step C To a stirred suspension of sodium hydride (130 mg, 95%, 5.4 mmol) in 8 mL of N, N'-dimethylforamide at room temperature was added ethanethiol (0.45 mL, 6.0 mmol) dropwise. After 5 min, the mixture became a clear solution, and was added to a stirred solution of the product obtained from Step B above (0.45 g, 1.56 mmol) in 2 mL of N, N'-dimethylforamide in a round bottom flask. The flask was sealed with a ground glass stopper, and the mixture was heated at 90-95°C for 4 h.

After cooled to room temperature, the mixture was poured into 20 mL of a 1.0 M NaOH aqueous solution, further rinsed with 20 mL of H20. The aqueous mixture was washed with diethyl ether (30 mL x 2), adjusted to PH-5 using a 0.5 M HCI aqueous solution, and extracted with CH2CI2 (50 mL x4). The combined extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated to a dark yellow solution. This was dissolved in 50 mL of ethyl acetate, washed with H20 (30 mL x2) and brine (30 mL), dried over Na2SO4. Evaporation of solvent gave 0.422 g of the alcohol product (99%, MH+ = 275.0).

Step D The alcohol obtained from Step C above (0.467 g, 1.70 mmol) was brominated using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step D, to afford the corresponding bromide in 0.607 g (100%).

Step E The bromide obtained from Step D above (0.607 g, 1.72 mmol) was methylated using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step E, to give the desired product in 0. 408 g (65%, M+ = 367, M+2 = 369.1).

Step F The product (0.405 g, 1.103 mmol) from Step E above was converted to the imine compound (0.29 g, 56%) using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step F.

Step G The imine product obtained from Step F above (0.29 g, 0.61 mmol) was demethylated using the procedure set forth in Step C above to give the corresponding alcohol as a dark yellow oil, which was dissolved in 5 mL methanol and added with sodium acetate (0.12 g, 1.46 mmol) and hydroxyamine hydrochloride (0.075 g, 1.08 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h, and poured into 10 mL of 1.0 M NaOH aqueous solution. 30 mL of H20 was used as rinsing and combined to the aqueous layer. The aqueous mixture was washed with diethyl ether (40 mL x 3), adjusted to pH-6 using a 1.0 M HCI aqueous solution, and extracted with ethyl acetate (40 mL x 3). The organic extracts were washed with H20 (20 mL x2), brine (20 mL), dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to give 0.112 g of the desired hydroxy-amino thiophene sulfonamide (64%, MH+ = 290).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13. 35 /i + N St/\ met 0 I I step O st \ zu OH

Step A To a solution of 2-methyl furan (1.72g) in ether was added BuLi (8.38mL) at - 78°C and stirred at room temperature for half an hour. The reaction mixture again cooled to-78°C and quenched with cyclopropyl amide 1 and stirred for two hours at - 78°C and slowly warmed to room temperature. The reaction mixture stirred for three hours at room temperature and quenched with the addition of saturated ammonium chloride solution. The mixture was taken to a separatory funnel, washed with water, brine and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtration and removal of solvent afforded the crude ketone, which was purified by using column chromatography to afford the ketone 3. Og (87%) as a pale yellow oil.

Step B To a solution of ketone (1. 0g) in THF (5. 0mL) at 0°C was added R-methyl oxazoborolidine (1. 2MI, 1 M in toluene) dropwise followed by addition of a solution of borane complexed with dimethyl sulfide (1.85mL, 2M in THF). The reaction mixture was stirred for 30minutes at 0°C and than at room temperature for one hour. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0°C and MeOH was added carefully. The mixture was stirred for 20 minutes and was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was extracted with ether, washed with water, 1M HCI (10mL), saturated sodium bicarbonate (10. 0mL) water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and removal of solvent afforded the crude alcohol which was purified by silica gel chromatography to afford the pure alcohol 0. 91 g (91 %) as yellow oil.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.36 0 0 step A ° _° l °, o l step B ir OH Step A An equimolar mixture of 2-methylfuran (1. 0g) and anhydride (2. 6g) was mixed with SnCI4 (0. 05mL) and heated at 100°C for 3 hours. After cooling the reaction mixture, water (10mL) was added, followed by saturated sodium carbonate solution until it becomes alkaline. The reaction mixture was extracted with ether several times and the combined ether layer was washed with water, brine and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtration and removal of solvent afforded the crude ketone, which was purified by using silica gel chromatography to afford the ketone 0.9g (43%) as a yellow oil.

Step B The step B alcohol was obtained following a similar procedure set forth in the preparative example 13.35 Step B.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.37 + , step A/r'\/ Br 4 + W < Oh

Step A To a solution of 5-methyl furan-2-aldehyde (1. 0g) and 3-bromo-3,3- difluoropropene (2.24g) in DMF (30mL) was added indium powder (1.66g) and lithium iodide (50. 0mg). The reaction mixture was stirred over night, diluted with water and extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with water, brine and purified by silicagel chromatography to afford the pure alcohol 2. 8g (92%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 13.38-13. 45 Following a similar procedure set forth in Preparative Examples 13.25 and 13. 35, and using the indicated Furan and Electrophile, the following Alcohols in the Table below were prepared. Prep. Furan Electrophile Alcohol Yield ex 13. 38 CHO 86% I/\ Ho"YQ HO/0 13. 39 \ F F 69% p/-COOEt HO 0

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 13.50-13. 61 Following a similar procedure set forth in Preparative Examples 13.25, and using the indicated Alcohol, the following Amines in the Table below were prepared. PREP. % YIELD EX. ALCOHOL AMINE CF3 13. 50 13. 45 Ou / 13. 51 13. 38 58% H2N"\-Q zu 13. 52 13. 36 69% HsN yo 13. 53 13. zu 81% H2N/0 F 13. 54 13. 37 F F 82% H2N I O - 45% F F 13. 55 13. 39 H2N/0 13. 56 13. 41 57% H2N l/0 PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.70 c s step A Ets Ph step B Ets N ph- zur met met step C ir S \ Ph step D - NH2 Nph- oT n Ph 0 meo MeO

Step A The imine was prepared following the procedure set forth in the preparative example 13.19 from the known bromoester (1. 0g) as a yellow solid, Step A to yield 1. 1g (79%).

Step B The Step A product (0.6g) was reacted following the procedure set forth in the preparative example 13.19 to give the amine product 0. 19g (64%).

Step C The Step B product (1. 0g) was reacted following the procedure set forth in the preparative example 13.19 to give the acid as yellow solid 0.9g (94%) Step D The Step C product (0.35g) was reacted following the procedure set forth in the preparative example 13.19 to give the amino acid as yellow solid 0. 167g (93%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 13.71

Following a similar procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.33 Step E, but using the product from Preparative Example 13.32, the title compound was obtained (121 mg, 69% yield, MH+ = 223.0).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 14 NH2 l NH2 Step A I N02 FEZ Step B > nu2

Step A 3-Nitro-1, 2-phenylenediamine (10 g), sodium nitrite (5.4 g) and acetic acid (20 mL) were heated at 60°C overnight, then concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The product precipitated from the organic phase (5.7 g) as a solid and used directly in step B.

Step B The product from Step A above (2.8 g) was stirred with 10% Pd/C (0.3 g) in MeOH (75 mL) under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite and the filtrate concentrated in vacuo, to give the product (2. 2 g, MH+=135).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 15 H I O I N. Step A H Step B \ N, Step C | Br Br Br Step C p O O Step E N Step D //N I l/N I HO NH2 HO N02 Br No2

Step A N-methyl-4-bromopyrazole-3-carboxylic acid was prepared according to known methods, see: Yu. A. M.; Andreeva, M. A.; Perevalov, V. P.; Stepanov, V. i. ; Dubrovskaya, V. A.; and Seraya, V. l. in Zh. Obs. Khim, (Journal of General Chemistry of the USSR) 1982,52, 2592 (and the references cited therein) the disclosure of whichis incorporated hereinby reference thereto.

Step B To a solution of N-methyl-4-bromopyrazole-3-carboxylic acid (2.0 g), available from step A, in 65 mL of anhydrous DMF was added bromotripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBrop, 4.60 g), dimethyl amine (10 mL, 2.0 M in THF) and diisopropylethyl amine (5.2 mL) at 25 °C. The mixture was stirred for 26 h, and concentrated under reduced pressure to an oily residue. This residue was treated with a 1.0 M NaOH aqueous solution, and extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL x 4).

The organic extracts were combined, washed with brine, and dried with anhydrous Na2SO4. Removal of solvents yielded an oil, which was purified by preparative thin layer chromatography, eluting with CH2CI2-MeOH (20: 1), to give 1.09 g of the amide product (48%, MH+ = 232.0).

Step C To a solution of the amide (0.67 g), obtained from step B, in 8 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid at 0 °C was added potassium nitrate (1.16 g) in small portions. The cooling bath was removed and the mixture was heated at 110 °C for 6 h. After cooling to 25 °C, the mixture was poured into 80 mL of H20, and an additional

20 mL of H20 was used as a rinse. The aqueous mixture was extracted with CH2CI2 (100 mL x 4). The combined extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), sat. NaHC03 aqueous solution (50 mL), brine (50 mL), and dried with Na2SO4. Evaporation of solvent gave an oil, which solidified on standing. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography, eluting with CH2CI2-MeOH (1: 0,50 : 1 and 40: 1).

Removal of solvents afforded 0.521 g (65%) of the product as a solid (MH+ = 277.1) Step D The product (61 mg) obtained from step C was dissolved in 3 mL of THF. To this solution at-78 °C was added dropwise along the inside wall of the flask a 1.6 M solution of n-butyl lithium in hexane. After 45 min, a solution of methyl borate (0.1 mL) in THF (1.0 mL) was added. After 1.5 h, a solution of acetic acid in THF (0.25 mL, 1: 10 v/v) was added to the cold mixture. Stirring was continued for 10 min, and a 30 wt % aqueous hydrogen peroxide solution (0.1 mL) was added. An additional portion of hydrogen peroxide aqueous solution (0.05 mL) was added 20 min later. The cooling bath was removed, and the mixture was stirred at 25 °C for 36 h. The mixture was poured into 30 mL of H2O, and the aqueous mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (30 mL x 4). The extracts were combined, washed with brine (10 mL), 5% NaHC03 aqueous solution (10 mL) and brine (10 mL). The organic layer was dried with Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure to a residue, which was then purified by preparative thin layer chromatography eluting with CH2CI2-MeOH (20: 1) to give the hydroxylated product (5 mg, 10%, MH+ = 215.3).

Step E By treating the hydroxylated product of Step E with H2 under the conditions of 10% palladium on carbon in ethanol, one would obtain the desired hydroxyl-amino compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 16 I N Step A Step B N nul OH OH NAZI H N02 Step u) 0- N02 0 OH 0 OH 'r Stem don 0 OH O OH

Step A Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 13, Step C except using the known compound, 4-methyl-pyrimidin-5-ol, the product can be prepared.

Step B Following a similar oxidation procedure used in Preparative Example 15, Step A except using the compound from Step A above, the product can be prepared.

Step C Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 11, Step A except using the compound from Step B above, the product can be prepared.

Step D Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 12, Step F except using the compound from Step C above, the product can be prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 17 N N H I Step A I I Step B 0 O OH O OH N N N N N 2 N \ O OH O OH

Step A Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 11, Step A except using the known 4-hydroxynicotinic acid, the product can be prepared.

Step B Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 13, Step C except using the compound from Step A above, the product can be prepared.

Step C Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 12, Step F except using the compound from Step C above, the product can be prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 18 O N N Step A OH OH OH O N Step B OH OH

Step A Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 13, Step C except using the compound from Step A above, the product can be prepared.

Step B Stirring the compound from Step A above, a suitable Pt or Pd catalyst and EtOH under hydrogen atmosphere (1-4 atm) the product can be prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 19 The amine was prepared following WO 01/68570, the disclosure of whichis incorporated herein by reference thereto.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 19.1 The amine was prepared following WO 01/68570, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto.

PREPARTIVE EXAMPLE 20 The title compound was prepared according to the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 1, but instead using 4-nitrosalycilic acid (57%, MH+=181).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 22

The title compound is prepared according to the procedure outlined in J. Org.

Chem, V 48, No: 6,1983, P 763-767.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 22.1 Following a similar procedure outlined in J. Org. Chem, V 48, No: 6,1983, P 763-767, but using the sulfonamide prepared in Izvestiya Akademii Nauk SSSR, Seriya Khimicheskaya (1978), (9), 2084-90, the title compound could be prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 22.2 Following a similar procedure outlined in J. Org. Chem, V 48, No: 6,1983, P 763-767, but using the sulfonamide prepared in Journal of Organic Chemistry (1959), 24,1983-6, the title compound could be prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 22.3 0 0 0 0 p p Step A 1l \g Step B N \ S % N CI \C 1 C OEt . "- '/-\ ci ci ci OEt Step A If one were to treat the commercially available chloroacetylsulfonylchloride with dimethyl amine (1 eq) in THF according to standard procedures, the sulfonyl chloride intermediate could be obtained.

Step B Following a similar procedure outlined in J. Org. Chem, V 48, No: 6,1983, P 763-767, but using the product from Step A above, the title compound could be prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 22.4 Following a similar procedure outlined in J. Org. Chem, V 48, No: 6,1983, P 763-767, but using the sulfonamide prepared in Bioorganic Chemistry (1996), 24 (3), 242-250, the title compound could be prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 23.10A Following a similar procedure as that used in the Preparative Example 1302 Steps A-C, except using pyrrolidine in Step A instead of diethyl amine and 50psi hydrogen pressure in the hydrogenation Step C, the title compound was obtained (80%, 1. 0g, MH+ = 243.1) PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 23. 10B

Following the same procedure set forth in the Preparative Example 23. 10A, except by using 30psi hydrogen pressure in the hydrogenation Step C, the title compound was obtained (83%, 1.2g, MH+ = 277.1).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 24 o zozo Step A H "/"O"j N = o o H II H II H 0 H 0 O H H Step B HCI. NHa N O Step A To a solution of N-protected amino acid (1.5 g, 6.9 mmol) in CH2CI2 (25 mL) at room temperature was added DIPEA (3.6 mL, 20.7 mmol), and PyBrop (3.4 g, 6.9 mmol) followed by MeNH2 (6.9 mL, 13.8 mmol, 2.0 M in CH2CI2). The resulting solution was stirred for 18 h at room temperature (until TLC analysis deemed the reaction to be complete). The resulting mixture was washed sequentially with 10% citric acid (3 x 20 mL), sat. aq. NaHC03 (3 x 20 mL), and brine (3 x 20 mL). The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure.

The crude product was purified by flash chromatography eluting with CH2CI2/MeOH (40: 1) to afford 1.0 g (63% yield) of a solid.

Step To a round bottom charged with the N-protected amide (1.0 g, 4.35 mmol) (from Step A) was added 4N HCI/dioxane (10 mL) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture was diluted with Et2O (20 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was treated with Et20 (2 x 20 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 0.72 g (-100 % yield) of crude product as the HCI salt. This material was taken on without further purification or characterization.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 25-33.1 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 24 but using the commercially available N-protected amino acids and amines in the Table below, the amine hydrochloride products were obtained.

Prep Amino acid Amine Product Yield Ex. 25 NH3 a) N OH CIHH2'N NH2 H Or O i 71 0 0 /CIHHZN Il O O 27 66 ou CIHH N N \ 28 65 0 H 28 p/H/I 65 27 o CIH. HN N \ O H2N 0 29 /p 0 Nf N Y N hop 30 p U H/ 8 ON OH H N H. N Nwi'/ CIH 2 fl H YO--N-I=y OH H2N CIHH2-NI" PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 33.2 V Step A NHVQ Step B NHVQ OH > BOCHNf o H2N BOCHNf o-o p _ _ HCI HCI

Step A BOC-valine (45mg) and PS-carbodiimide (200mg) were suspended in CH2CI2 (4ml). After addition of the CH2CI2-amine solution (0.138N, 1ml), the mixture was shaken overnight. The solution was filtered and the resin was washed with more CH2CI2, and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to yield the product, which was carried on directly in Step B.

Step B The crude material from Step A was dissolved in 4N HCI/dioxane (2. 5moi) and stirred for 2h. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo to yield the desired amine hydrochloride, which was used directly in the next step.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 33.3-33. 47 Following the procedure set forth in Example 33.2 but using the commercially available N-protected amino acids in the Table below, the amine hydrochloride products were obtained.

Prep Ex. Amino acid Amine Product 33. 3 HCI H / H/\ zou H Ipl \ N HZN HN II O 0 33. 4 N, N, HCI o H HzN-° Han 33. 5 HCI H2N N OU Han 0 o 33. 6 HCI H O N_ OH H2N \ H 0 0 33. 7 H2N-_o H Oh O N CI 0 33. 8 o /H2N I N \ ou CI Preparative Example 34

To a solution of 3-chlorobenzaldehyde (2.0 g, 14.2 mmol) in THF (5 mL) at 0 °C was added LiN (TMS) 2 (17.0 ml, 1.0 M in THF) dropwise and the resulting solution was stirred for 20 min. EtMgBr (6.0 mL, 3.0 M in Et20) was added dropwise and the mixture was refluxed for 24 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, poured into saturated aqueous NtCi (50 mL), and then extracted with CH2CI2 (3 x 50 volumes). The organic layers were combined, concentrated under reduced pressure.

The crude residue was stirred with 3 M HCI (25 mL) for 30 min and the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (3 x 15 mL) and the organic layers were discarded. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0 °C ana treated with solid NaOH pellets until pH = 10 was attained. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (3 x 15 mL) and the organic layers were combined. The organic layer was washed with brine (1 x 25 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 1.6 g (66% yield) of the crude amine as an oil (MH+ 170). This material was determined to be >90% pure and was used without further purification.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.1 The aldehyde (3.5g) and conc. HCl(20ml) were combined and stirred overnight at 40°C. The reaction mixture was poured into cold water and extracted with ether, washed with satd. NaHCO3 and brine, dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 1.76g of product (55%) PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.2

Chlorine was bubbled into 100mol of CH2CI2 at 10°C. The aldehyde (3. 73ml) was charged with 50ml of CHC13 and then cooled to 0°C. AIC13 was added portionwise, followed by the chlorine solution and let stir at room temperature overnight. The reaction was poured into 150ml of ice and 50moi of 3N HCI and stirred for 30min. Organic layer was washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified via flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc 40/1) to yield 1.5g of pure product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.3 , OH Step A N Step B NH2 F3C) t1, F3CX > F3CX i i Step A The ketone (3.25g) was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 88.2, Step B to give the oxime (3.5g, 99%).

Step B The product from step A (1.2g) was stirred with AcOH (3ml) and Pd/C (10%, 300mg) in EtOH (40moi) under a hydrogen atmosphere overnight. The reaction

mixture was filtered through celite and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The crude material dissolved in ether and washed with 2N NaOH, organic washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to give product (960mg, 86%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.4 Oh Step A I Step B O Br/< Brw EtO OEt Br) < Br - Step C Step D 1 0 Fi/ .// NH2 Step A To a suspension of NaH (1.45g) in DMF (25ml) under a nitrogen atmosphere was added p-bromophenol (5g) at 0°C. After stirring for 20min, BrCH2CH (OEt) 2 (5. 3ml) was added and the reaction was heated to reflux overnight. The solution was cooled and poured into ice water (80ml) and extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with 1 N NaOH and brine, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 8.4g of crude product (100%) Step B To a solution of the product from Step A (8.4g) in benzene (50mut) was added polyphosphoric acid (10g). The mixture was heated at reflux for 4 hrs. The reaction was cooled to 0°C and poured into ice water (80ml) and extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 4.9g of crude product (85%) Step C To a solution of the product from Step B (2g) in ether (20ml) at-78°C was added t-BuLi dropwise. After stirring for 20min, DMF (950mg) was added dropwise and the mixture was stirred at-25°C for 3hrs and then warmed to room temperature overnight. Saturated ammonium chloride was added and the solution was extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with brine, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 980mg of crude product (67%).

Step D To a solution of aidehyde (400g) in ether (1 Oml) was added LiN (TMS) 2 (1 M in THF, 3. 3ml) at 0°C dropwise. The solution was stirred at 0°C for 30min and EtMgBr (3M in THF, 1. 83moi) was added dropwise. The reaction was refluxed overnight, cooed to 0°C, quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with ether.

The ether was stirred with 3N HCI (20ml), then the aqueous layer was basified with NaOH pellets and extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with brine, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 220mg of product (46%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.5 OH-0 Br\\,,. Step A I Step B Br Br Bu bu bu p NH 5tep D I \ Step C/ / p NHZ H

Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 34.4 Steps A through D, but using m-bromophenol (8g), both amines were formed and separated by preparative plate chromatography (63-65%, MH+=175).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.6

To a solution of 3-methyl-thiophene (5g) in ether (50ml) was added dropwise a solution of n-BuLi (1.6M in hexane, 32ml). The mixture was stirred for 1.5hr at room temperature. DMF (5.1 ml) was then added and let stir overnight. The mixture was poured into saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified via flash column chromatography (EtOAc/Hex 20: 1) to afford 5.27g of an oil (84%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.7

0 OCH3 OCH3 0 HX H3COStegB H3COfWStePC H) l Ste A Step C O \/ Bu Step A To a solution of 4-bromo-2-furaldehyde (4g) in MeOH (75ml) was added trimethyl-orthoformate (3. 8ml). A catalytic amount of p-toluene sulfonic acid (195mg) and the mixture was heated to reflux for 3.5hr. The reaction was cooled down and potassium carbonate was added. The mixture was filtered through a silica gel pad.

The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dissolved in CH2CI2 and filtered. The filtrate was again concentrated in vacuo to give 4.03g of product (80%).

Step B To a solution of the product from Step A (2.02g) in THF (80mi) at-78°C was added dropwise a solution of n-BuLi (2.5M in hexanes, 4. 4ml) and stirred for 1.5hr. A solution of iodomethane (1. 7moi) was added and let stir for 2.5hrs at-60°C. The cooling bath was removed and saturated ammonium chloride was added and let stir for 10min. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford 1.34g of crude product.

Step C The product from Step B (1.43g) was dissolved in acetone (50mut) and treated with a catalytic amount of p-toluene sulfonic acid (80mg). The mixture was heated to reflux for 2hr. The reaction was cooled down and solid potassium carbonate was added. The mixture was filtered through a silica gel pad and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 1. 246g of crude product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.8 0 0 0 H. <NO2 Step Step p Step B H NO2 N02 0 O Ste D Step C - ho-

Step A To a stirred solution of potassium t-butoxide (2.5g) in HMPA (20ml) was added 2-nitropropane (2ml) dropwise. After 5min, a solution of methyl-5-nitro-2-furoate (3.2g) in HMPA (8ml) was added to the mixture and stirred for 16hr. Water was added and the aqueous mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The EtOAc layer was washed with water, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 6: 1) to yield 3.6g of product (90%).

Step B To a solution of the product from Step A (3.6g) in toluene (16ml) was added tributyltin hydride (5. 4ml) followed by AIBN (555mg). The mixture was heated to 85°C for 3.5hr. After cooling, the mixture was separated by flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 7: 1) to afford 2.06g of product (73%).

Step C To a solution of product from Step B (2.05g) in THF (60ml) at 0°C was added a solution of LAH (1M in ether, 12. 8mi). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 30min. Water and 1 M NaOH was added until a precipitate formed, diluted with EtOAc, stirred for 30min and then filtered through a celite pad. The organic filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 1.56g of product (93%).

Step D To a solution of product from Step C (2. 15g) in CH2CI2 (1 00ml) was added Dess-Martin oxidant (7.26g) in CH2CI2 (45ml) and stirred for 30min. The mixture was diluted with ether (200ml). The organic layer was washed with 1 N NaOH, water and brine, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give oil and solid. The material was extracted with ether and filtered. Some solid crystallized out from the filtrate, filtered again, and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 2. 19g of product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.9 o o O NH2 Step A/Step B N- \ Step C Step D/ p 0 OMe N/ \N N Ou Step A To a solution of carboxylic acid (5g) in CH2CI2 (400ml) at 0°C was added N (OCH3) CH3. HCI (11. 5g), DEC (15. 1g), HOBt (5.3g) and NMM (43ml) and stirred for 14hr. The mixture was diluted with CH2C (100ml) and the organic layer was washed with 10% HCI, saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford 5.74g of crude product (85%).

Step B To a solution of iodoethane (0. 56ml) in ether (5ml) at-78°C was added a solution of t-BuLi (1.7M in pentane, 8. 3ml) dropwise. The mixture was warmed to room temperature for 1 hr and transferred to a 100ml round bottom charged with the product from Step A (1g) in THF (12ml) at-78°C. The mixture was stirred at-78°C for 1 hr and at 0°C for an additional 2hr. 1 M HCI was added dropwise followed by CH2CI2. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford 620mg of product (76%).

Step C To a solution of the product from Step B (620mg) in THF/MeOH (10: 1) at 0°C was added NaBH4 (250mg) in one portion. The mixture was stirred overnight at 0°C,

concentrated in vacuo and the crude material was dissolved in CH2CI2 and washed with 1 N NaOH and brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford 510mg of product.

Step D The above material was reacted in the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 75.75 Steps B and C to yield 170mg of amine product (28%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.10 The above amine was made analogous to the procedures set forth in Patent W096/22997 p. 56 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), but using ethylglycine instead of benzylglycine in the DCC coupling.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34. 11 OH p OH CT JL. N02 ! NO. P F I I F r Step A To the nitro compound (3.14g) and cyclohexylmethanol (1.14g) in THF (50ml) was added PPH3 (4.72g) and cooled to 0°C. Diisopropylazadicarboxylate (3. 15moi) was added dropwise and let stir overnight. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo and purified via flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 30: 1) to give product (3.3g), which was carried on directly to the next step.

Step B To the product from step A (3.3g) in EtOH (50ml) was added 10% Pd/C (1.7g) under a hydrogen atmosphere at 55psi and let stir overnight. The reaction was filtered through celite and concentrated in vacuo to give 3.2g of product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.12 0 0 HO<CF3 Step A > CF Step B <_CF3 -Vol

Step A A solution of acid (2g) in ether (20mut) was added dropwise to a suspension of LiAIH4 (350mg) in ether (15ml) at 0°C. The solution was refluxed for 3hr and stirred at room temperature ovenright. 5% KOH was added and reaction was filtered, extracted with ether, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the product (1.46g, 79%, MH+=166).

Step B To a solution of alcohol from above (1.46g) in CH2CI2 at room temperature was added Dess-Martin reagent (5.6g) portionwise and one drop of water and let stir over the weekend at room temperature. 10% Na2S203 was added and stirred for 20min, extracted with CH2CI2, washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to afford 1. 1g of product (76%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.13

The above compound was prepared according to the procedure set forth in EP 0 555 153 A1 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.14

The aldehyde (500mg) from above was reacted following the procedure set forth in the Preparative Example 13.4, Step A to yield 372mg of product (76%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.15-34. 16 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 34.8 but using the nitroalkanes indicated in the table below, the aldehydes were prepared. PREP. NITROALKANE ALDEHYDE YIELD Ex.) Ex. 34. 15 0 17 01 34. 16 r-a o 21 < 9 H XC1

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.17 0 0 0 Br Step A 0, Br Step B Br Step C 0 0 Step E Step D Br H E HO

Step A To a stirred suspension of 5-bromo-2-furoic acid (15.0 g, 78. 54 mmol) in 225 mL of CH2CI2 at room temperature was added oxalyl chloride followed by a catalytic amount of N, N'dimethylforamide. After 1 h, ethanol (20 mL) was added followed by triethylamine (22 mL). Reaction was continued for 15 h. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to a residue, which was extracted with excess volume of hexanes, and hexanes-CH2CI2 (3: 1, v/v). The extracts were filtered, the filtrated was concentrated to a yellow oil, dried on high vacuum, yielding 17.2 g (93%) of the desired ester.

Step B The ester product obtained from Step A above (17.2 g, 73.18 mmol) was converted to 2-ethyl-4-tertbutyl-5-bromo-furoate (7.9 g, 37%) using the literature procedure: J. Am. Chem. Soc. , 1939, 61, 473-478 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

Step C The ester product obtained from Step B above (7.9 g, 27.13 mol) was reduced to the alcohol (6.32 g) using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 34.8, Step C.

Step D The product obtained from Step C above (6.32 g) was dissolved in 140 mL of THF and cooled in a-78°C bath. A 2.5 M solution of n-butyllithium in hexanes (22 mL, 55.0 mmol) was added dropwise along the side wall of the flask. After 15 min, H2O (-70 mL) was added. Cooling bath was removed, the mixture was stirred for an additional 1 h. Brine (50 mL) and CH2CI2 (300 mL) were added, the two layers were separated, the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (100 mL), and the combined organic layers ere dried by Na2SO4. Evaporation of solvents afforded 5.33 g (crude) of the debrominated product as a reddish brown oil.

Step E The alcohol product obtained from Step D above (5.33g) was oxidized to the corresponding aldehyde (3.06 g, 74% over three steps) using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 34.8, Step D.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.18 Step A Step B 0-0- 0 oh 1 or H or-IL 0 OH I H Step C if 0 Step D Step A To a stirred solution of cyclopropyl bromide (4.0 mL, 50 mmol) in 120 mL of ether at-78°C was added dropwise a 1.7M solution of t-butyllithium in pentane (44.5 mL, 75.7 mmol). After 10 min, cooling bath was removed, stirring was continued for 1.5 h. The mixture was cooled again in a-78°C bath, and 3-furaldehyde (3.5 mL, 41.9 mmol) was added. Reaction was continued for 1 h, and quenched with a saturated NH4CI aqueous solution. The aqueous mixture was extracted with CH2CI2 (100 mL x 3). The organic extracts were washed with brine, dried by Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 5.3 g (91 %) of the alcohol product as a yellow oil.

Step B Chloro trimethylsilane (27.2 mL, 214.2 mmol) was added dropwise to a vigorously stirred suspension of sodium iodide (32 g, 213.5 mmol) in 100 mL of acetonitrile. After 5 min, a solution of the alcohol obtained f om Step A above (4.93 g, 35.68 mmol) in 100 mL of acetonitrile was added dropwise. Stirring was continued for 5 min. H20 (100 mL) was added, the layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted with ether (100 mL x 2). The organic layers were combined, washed with a 10 % Na2S203 aqueous solution and brine, and dried over Na2SO4.

Evaporation of solvents gave a dark brown oil, which was filtered through a 5-in silica

gel column, eluting with CH2CI2-hexanes (1: 3.5, v/v). Removal of solvents afforded 4.22 g (47%) of the iodo product as a light yellow oil.

Step C The iodo-product obtained from Step B above (2.2 g, 8.8 mmol) was dissolved in 60 mL of ether, and stirred in a-78°C bath. A 1.7 M solution of t-butyllithium in pentane (10.4 mL, 17.7 mmol) was added dropwise. After 20 min, cooling bath was removed. Reaction was continued for 2.5 h, and quenched with H20 (20 mL). The aqueous mixture was stirred overnight and separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with ether (30 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried by Na2SO4, and filtered through a Celite pad. Removal of solvent gave 1.10 g (100%) of 3-butylfuran as a reddish-yellow oil.

Step D 3-Butylfuran (1.1 g, 8.8 mmol), obtained from Step C above, was dissolved in 60 mL of ether, and stirred in a-78°C bath. A 1.7 M solution of t-butyllithium in pentane (6.0 mL, 10.2 mmol) was added dropwise along the side wall of the flask. The mixture was stirred for 3 h from-78°C to 0°C, and continued for 1 h at room temperature. A solution of N, N'-dimethylforamide (1.1 mL, 14.23 mmol) was added.

Reaction was continued overnight, and quenched with a saturated NH4CI aqueous solution. The two layers were separated, the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (30 mL x 2). The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated to an oil, which was purified by preparative TLC (CH2CI2- hexanes = 1: 1.5, v/v) to give 0.48 g (36%) of the aldehyde (contaminated by some 3- butyl-2-furaldehyde).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 34.19 o _ Step A 6 Step B H 8 /--

Step A 3-Ethylfuran was prepared from 3-hydroxymethylfuran according to literature procedure: J. Org. Chem., 1983, 48, 1106-1107 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

Step B 3-Ethylfuran obtained from Step A above was converted to 4-ethyl-2- furaldehyde using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 34.32, Step D.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 35-51.21 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 34 but using the commercially available aldehydes and Grignard reagents listed in the Table below, the amine products below were obtained. Prep Ex. Aldehyde Grignard Amine 1. Yield Reagent 2. MH" 35 H) t t 2. 154 H I/H2N I 36 Q o'--EtMgBr 1. 75% 2. 9 80 H 2N 37 0 CI EtMgBr ci 1. 78% H I H2N 2. 170 H 2N I i 38 0 CF3 EtMgBr C 1. 34% 3 2. 204 H I/H2N I w i

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 51.25-51. 31 Following the procedure set forth in Example 34 but using the commercially available aldehydes and Grignard reagents listed in the Table below, the amine products were obtained. Prep Ex. Aldehyde Grignard Amine Yield Reagent (%) 51. 25 20 H0 EtMgBr HN Hri k H I I i N 1-1 51. 26 77 0 o HN I O / /MgBr PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 52 H 0, , 0 N Step A I S / F3C / H O"," N Fs Step B H N Foc 2 O/

Step A A mixture of 2- (trifluoroacetyl) thiophene (2 mL, 15.6 mmol), hydroxylamine hydrochloride (2.2 g, 2 eq), diisopropylethylamine (5.5 mL, 2 eq) and MeOH (50 mL) was stirred at reflux for 48-72 hrs, then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with EtOAc, washed with 10% KH2PO4 and dried over Na2SO4 (anhydrous).

Filtration and concentration afforded the desired oxime (2.9 g, 96%) which was used directly in Step B without further purification.

Step B To a mixture of the product from Step A above in TFA (20 mL) was added Zn powder (3 g, 3 eq) portionwise over 30 min and stirred at room temperature overnight.

The solid was filtered and the mixture reduced in vacuo. Aqueous NaOH (2 M) was added and the mixture was extracted several times with CH2CI2. The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated to afford the desired product (1.4 g, 50%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 53-61 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 52 but using the commercially available ketones listed in the Table below, the following amines were obtained. Prep Ketone Amine 1. Yield (%) Example 2. MH 0 1. 11 53 H N g 2. 128 z 1. 33 54 2. 142 I S HN I S 0/1. 49 55 S 2. 156 I H2 N PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 62

To a cooled (0-5°C) suspension of L-a- (2-thienyl) glycine (0.5 g) and LiBH4 (2M in THF, 3.8 mL) in anhydrous THF (10 mL) was slowly added a THF (5 mL) solution of iodine (0.8 g). After stirring at room temperature for 15 min, the mixture was stirred at

relux overnight. After cooling to room temperature, MeOH was added dropwise until gas evolution ceased and after 30 min, the mixture was evaporated. The oily residue was stirred in 20 mL KOH for 4 hrs, diluted with brine and extracted with EtOAc.

The organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a crude mixture. Purification by flash column chromatography (50% EtOAc/CH2CI2, silica) afforded the product (0.3 g, 63%, MH+ = 144).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 63 CeCl3-7H20 was dried at 140-150°C for 22 hr. To this solid was added THF (80 mL, anhydrous) and after stirring for 2 hr, the suspension was cooled to-78°C and to it was added methyl lithium over 30 min. After stirring for an additional 30 min 2-thiophenecarbonitrile dissolved in anhydrous THF (4.5 mL) was added and the resulting mixture stirred for an additional 4.5 hr at-78°C. Concentrated aqueous NH3 (25 mL) was added and the mixture was warmed to room temperature and filtered through celite. The filtrate was extracted with dichloromethane, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a crude mixture. Purification by flash column chromatography (5% MeOH, CH2CI2, silica) afforded the desired product (1. 2 g, 62%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 64 0 OTMS Step A Step C F z step B F F Step B HN OH/ Step D I \ ''- > hi 2N I \ F F

Step A To a solution of (D)-valinol (4.16 g, 40.3 mmol) in CH2CI2 (60 mL) at 0 °C was added MgS04 (20 g) followed by dropwise addition of 3-fluorobenzaldehyde (5.0 g, 40.3 mmol). The heterogenous solution was stirred at 0°C for 2h and was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir overnight (14h). The mixture was filtered and the drying agent was washed with CH2CI2 (2 x 10 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 8.4 g (100%) of an oil which was taken onto the next step without further purification.

Step B To a solution of the imine (8.4 g, 40.2 mmol) from Step A in CH2CI2 (60 mL) at room temperature was added Et3N (6.2 mL, 44.5 mmol) followed by dropwise addition of TMSCI (5.7 mL, 44.5 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 6h at room temperature whereupon the ppt that had formed was filtered off and washed with CH2CI2 (2 x 10 mL). The combined filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure and was taken up in Et20/hexane (1: 1/150 mL). The precipitate was filtered off and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 10.1 g (89%) of the protected imine as an oil. This material was taken onto the next step without further purification.

Step C To a solution of Etl (4.0 g, 25.6 mmol) in Et20 (40 mL) at-78 °C was added t- BuLi (30.1 mL, 51.2 mmol, 1.7 M in pentane) and the mixture was stirred for 10 min.

The mixture was warmed to room temperature, stirred for 1 h, and was recooled to - 40 °C. A solution of the imine (6.0 g, 21.4 mmol) from Step B in Et20 (30 mL) was added dropwise via addition funnel to afford a bright orange mixture. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1.5 h at-40 °C then 3M HCI (50 mL) was added and the mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. Water (50 mL) was added and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (2 x 30 mL) and the organic layers were combined and discarded. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0 °C and carefully treated with solid NaOH pellets until pH = 12 was attained. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (3 x 30 mL) and the combined layers were washed with brine (1 x 30 mL). The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 4.8 g (94% yield) of the amine as an oil. This material was taken on crude to the next step without further purification.

Step D To a solution of amine (4.5 g, 18.8 mmol) from Step C in MeOH (80 mL) at room temperature was added MeNH2 (25 mL, 40% in water) followed by addition of a solution of H5106 (14.0 g, 61.4 mmol) in H20 (25 mL). The heterogenous mixture was stirred for 1.5 h (until the reaction was complete by TLC) and the precipitate was filtered off. The resulting filtrate was diluted with water (50 mL) and the mixture was extracted with Et20 (4 x 60 mL). The combined organic layers were concentrated to a volume of-30 mL whereupon 3M HCI (75 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred overnight (12h at room temperature) after which the mixture was concentrated to remove the volatiles. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (3 x 40 mL) and the organic layers were discarded. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0 °C and was carefully treated with solid NaOH pellets until pH-12 was reached. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (3 x 60 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried (Mg04). The organic layer was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 2.8 g (97% yield) of the desired amine as an oil [MH+ 154]. This compound was proven to be >85% pure by 1H NMR and was used crude in the subsequent coupling step.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 65-75. 10J Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 64 but using the prepared or commercially available aldehydes, amino alcohols, and organolithium reagents in the Table below, the optically pure amine products in the Table below were obtained. Prep Ex. Aldehyde Amino Organo Product 1. Yield (%) Alcohol lithium 2. MH 65 0 EtLi 1. 62 H2N 2. 154 H N w 2. 154 H2 OH 2 I F F 0 EtLi 1. 70 66 H H2N 2. 154 F F BuLi 2. 166 han i F F Li 1. 67 H H2N 2. 166 HAN OH F F 69 O EtLi 1. 67 F 2. 154 5X OH H2N 1. 42 1. 42 70 0 EtLi 2. 142 zu H HAN H2N OH 1. 36 71 0 EtLi 2. 142 S S H H2N s H2N I/H2N OH

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 75. 11-75. 59 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 64 but using the prepared or commercially available aldehydes, amino alcohols, and organolithium reagents in the Table below and carrying the amine on crude, the optically pure amine products in the Table below were obtained. Prep Ex. Aldehyde Amino Organo Product Yield Alcohol lithium 75. 11 0'7 52 lui H2N OH H2N H2N lui BuLi H I H2N OH H2N O 75. 13 0 iPrLi v 57 iPrLi H2N OH H2N loo/ 75. 14 HJX ~ß\ PrLi i 54 75. 14 0 iPrLi H O H2N OH H2N 0 58 75. 15 0 58 H S-. s H2N OH H2N 75. 160/Li\61 . I/Hz OH z I Et Et s Hz OH H2N I 75. 18 0 Li 17 68 75. 18 H S _, /H2 OH HaN PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 75.75 O OH je Step A p Step B Br Bu ber N3 o Step C or D NH2 au- Br Br

Step A To a solution of aldehyde (2.5g) in ether (50ml) at 0°C was added EtMgBr (4. 56ml) dropwise. The heterogenous mixture was stirred for 2hr at 0°C and then poured into a beaker of saturated ammonium chloride (25mi), ice and CH2CI2 (30mi).

After the biphasic mixture stirred for 1 Omin, the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product (2. 41g, 95%) Step B To a solution of alcohol from Step A above (1g) in toluene at room temperature was added DPPA. The mixture was cooled to 0°C and DBU was added and let stir for 12hr at room temperature. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with water, 1 N HCI and dried over Na2S04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. Purified by preparative plate chromatography (hexane/EtOAc 20/1) to give the product (840mg, 75%).

Step C To a solution of azide (730mg) from Step B above in THF (7ml) was added PPh3 (1 g). The heterogenous solution was stirred for 12hr, whereupon water (1. 5moi) was added. The mixture was refluxed overnight, cooled to room temperature and concentrated in vacuo. Ether and 1 N HCI were added to the residue. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0°C, basified with NaOH pellets and extracted with ether. The ether layer was dried over MgS04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product (405mg, 62%).

Step D To a solution of azide in THF at-10°C was added LiAIH4 portionwise. The heterogenous solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hr and then refluxed for 4hr. The solution was cooled to 0°C and water, 2M NaOH and ether were added to the reaction. The mixture was filtered through a celite pad. The filtrate was treated with 3N HCI. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0°C, basified with NaOH pellots and extracted with ether. The ether layer was dried over MgS04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 75.76-75. 90 Following a similar procedure set forth in Preparative Example 75.75, and using the reduction procedure indicated, the following amines were obtained. Prep Ex. Aldehyde Reducing Product Step % Yield 75. 76 D 43 0 w H2N O 75. 77 O O C 36 / \ H ( Han 75. 78 0 D 32 S /CI H2N CI 75. 79 Q C 42 H--o I han 75. 80 D 56 H2N H2N S S 75. 81 0 D 35 H H2N 0 Preparative Example 75.200

If one were to follow a similar procedure as that in Preparative Example 64, but using the aldehyde from Preparative Example 1004A and cyclopentyllithium instead of ethyllithium, the title aldehyde could be prepared.

Preparative Example 75.201 If one were to follow a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 75.200, but using 5-methylfuranaldehyde instead of the aldehyde from Preparative Example 1004A, the title aldehyde could be prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 76 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Med. Chem. 1996,39, 3319-3323 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto). PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 76. 1 < C Step B 0 Step A. O Step H2N . BOCHN i i Br Br Step C CIHH2N BOCHN) W i s S

Step A To a solution of amine from Preparative Example 75.90 (2.22g) in CH2CI2 (50ml) at 0°C was added TEA (3. 03ml) followed by BOC20 (2.85g). The heterogenous mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature overnight. 10% Citric acid was added to the reaction and the layers were separated. The organic layer was washed with saturated sod-ium bicarbonate, brine and dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc 10: 1) to afford 2.7g of an oil (81 %).

Step B Following the procedure from Preparative Example 13.4, Step A, but using the product from Step A above (450mg) and 3-thiophene boronic acid (284mg), the product was prepared (325mg, 71%).

Step C To the product from Step B (325g) wns added 4M HCI in dioxane (1.31 ml) and let stir for 1hr. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo and taken up in CH2CI2 and concentrated in vacuo again. This procedure was repeated 5 times to afford a semisolid (89%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 76.2-76. 3 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 76.1, but using the commercially available boronic acids, the indicated amines were prepared.

Prep Ex. Bozn c Acid Product Y e d %) 76. 2 70 N, O CIH. H2N \ B (OH) 2 76. 3 35 0 CIH. H N I IN A "o O PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 76.10

0 OH StepA,, Step B U. r Br Br Br Br Bu Step C p Step D Step C 0-Step D-0 Br Br Step A The product from Preparative Example 75.75, Step A (2.5g) was reacted via the Preparative Example 13. 11, Step B to give the ketone (1.93g, 78%).

Step B To a solution of ketone from Step A above (500mg) in THF (5ml) at 0°C was added S-2-methyl-CBS-oxazaborolidine (0. 98mut) dropwise followed by BH3. Me2S (1. 48mi). The mixture was stirred at 0°C for 2hr and was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir overnight. The mixture was cooled to 0°C and treated with MeOH (1 Oml). After stirring for 20min, the reaction was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in CH2CI2 and washed with 1 M HCI, saturated sodium

bicarbonate, water and brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo.

The crude material was purified by preparative plate chromatography (Hex/EtOAc 4: 1) to afford 650mg of an oil (89%).

Step C The chiral alcohol from Step B above was reacted via the Preparative Example 75.75 Step B to give the azide.

Step D The azide from Step C above was reacted via the Preparative Example 75.75 Step C to give the amine product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 76. 11 The desired compound was prepared as in Preparative Example 76.10, but using the R-2-methyloxazaborolidine in step B.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 77 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Med. Chem. 1996,39, 3319-3323 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 78

The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1991,39, 181-183 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 78.1 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Organometallic Chem. 1998, 567,31-37 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 79 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1991,39, 181-183 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 80 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in (a) Synthesis 1987,998-1001, (b) Synthesis 1996,641-646, and (c) J. Med. Chem. 1991,34, 2176-2186 (the disclosures of each reference being incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 81 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in (a) Synthesis 1987,998-1001, (b) Synthesis 1996,641-646 and (c) J. Med. Chem. 1991,34, 2176-2186 (the disclosures of each reference being incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 82 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Med. Chem. 1988, 31, 2176-2186 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 83

a) CIC02Et, Et3N b) NaN3, hi0 \ O WJ c) t-BuOH, toluene H2N d) 3M HCI, neutralize To a solution of carboxylic acid (1.5 g, 7.89 mmol) in H20/acetone (1: 10/12 mL total) at 0°C was added Et3N (1.43 mL, 10.3 mmol) followed by addition of ethyl chloroformate (0.83 mL, 8.68 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 30 min after which a solution of NaN3 (0.77g, 11. 8 mmol) in H20 (2 mL) was added dropwise. The resultant heterogenous mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0°C, then cold water (5 mL) and Et20 (10 mL) were added. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (2 x 10 mL). The organic layers were combined, toluene (20 mL) was added, and the organic layers were dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of 20 mL. t-BuOH (5 mL) was added and the mixture was refluxed for 12h. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the crude residue was taken up in 3M HCI (30 mL) and was heated at reflux for 12h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and extracted with Et20 (3 x 15 mL). The aqueous layer wa s cooled to 0 °C and solid NaOH pellets were added until pH-12 was reached. The aqueous layer was extracted with Et20 (3 x 30 mL) and the combined organic layers were dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 0.78 g (61 % yield) of an oil [MH+ 162]. This material was used without further purification.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 84

The corresponding cyclopropyl analog was prepared according to the procedure outlined in Preparative Example 83.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 85 The corresponding cyclohexyl analog was prepared according to the procedure outlined in Preparative Example 83.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 86 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Org. Chem. 1978,43, 892-898 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 88.2 OH S Step A o S Step B I s Cf Step C C ! 3 H2NJX

Step A 2-Methylthiophene (3g) was dissolved in THF and cooled to-40°C.

N-butyllithium (2.5M in hexane, 12. 24moi) added dropwise and let stir at-40°C for 30min. CuBr. (CH3) 2S (6.29g) added and let warm to-25°C where the trifluoroaceticanhydride (4. 32ml) was added. The reaction was stirred at-15°C over the weekend. The reaction was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer washed with brine, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 4.59g of an oil (78%).

Step B The product from Step A (4.58g), hydroxylamine hydrochloride (3g), sodium acetate (4.4g), EtOH (75ml) and H20 (7. 5ml) were combined and heated to 75°C overnight. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo, taken up 1 N HCI, extracted with ether, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 4.58g of the product (93%, MH+=210).

Step C The product from Step B above (4.5g) was dissolved in TFA (40ml) and cooled to 0°C. Zn powder (4.2g) was added portionwise and let reaction warm to room temperature and stir overnight. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo, taken up in 1 N NaOH, extracted with ether, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give 3.43g of the product (80%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 89 Step A I I > H2N HCI. H2N OH OMe

To a solution of KH (0.45 g, 11.3 mmol) in THF (15 mL) at room temperature was added amine hydrochloride (0.85 g, 5.1 mmol) portionwise to afford a heterogenous reaction mixture. The mixture was allowed to stand overnight (12h) and Mel (0.32 mL, 5.1 mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 6h after which the mixture was carefully poured into cold brine (125 mL). The mixture was extracted with Et20 (3 x 25 mL) and the organic layers were combined. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the crude product as an oil. This material was carried on crude to the coupling step without further purification or characterization.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 89.1 To a solution of KH (1. 1g) in THF (20ml) at room temperature was added (R)- 2-amino-l-butanol 48ml) dropwise to afford a heterogenous mixture. The mixture was allowed to stand overnight (18hr) and then Mel (1. 59moi) was added dropwise.

The mixture was stirred for 4hr after which brine was added. Extracted with ether, dried with K2CO3, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford 1.75g of an oil.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 89.2 To a solution of KH (1.1g) in THF (20ml) at room temperature was added (S)- 2-amino-1-butanol 48ml) dropwise to afford a heterogenous mixture. The mixture was allowed to stand overnight (18hr) and then Mel (1. 59ml) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 4hr after which brine was added. Extracted with ether, dried with K2CO3, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford 1.75g of an oil.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 90

Step A HCI. H2NX > H2N X OH OMe OH The corresponding cis analog was prepared in an analogous fashion utilizing the procedure described in Preparative Example 89. This material was also used without further purification.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 91 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in J. Org. Chem. 1987,52, 4437-4444 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 92 The desired compound was prepared according to methods previously described in Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn. 1962,35, 11-16 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 93

The desired amine was prepared from the corresponding ketone according to standard methods previously described in (a) Synthesis 1987,998-1001, (b) Synthesis 1996,641-646 and (c) J. Med. Chem. 1991,34, 2176-2186 (the disclosures of each being incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 94

The desired amine was prepared from the corresponding ketone according to standard methods previously described in (a) Synthesis 1987,998-1001, (b) Synthesis 1996,641-646 and (c) J. Med. Chem. 1991,34, 2176-2186 (the disclosures of each being incorporated herein by reference thereto).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 95 Step A NC Step B Step C Li Me Me Li ivre Me

Step A Lithium hexamethyidisilylazide (34 mL, 1 M in THF) was added dropwise to a - 78°C THF (20 mL) solution of isobutyronitrile (2.8 mL). After 40 min, cyclopropyl- methylbromide (5 g) was added and the mixture warmed to and stirred at 25°C overnight. After cooling to 0°C, 1 M HCI (aq) was added and the mixture was

extracted with diethyl ether, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo at 0°C to give the desired product (4.5 g).

Step B Methyl Lithium (17 mL, 1.4 M in Et20) was added to the product from Step A above (1.5 g) in Et20 (anhydrous) at 0°C. The mixture was stirred at 0-25°C overnight, then diluted with 3M HCI (aq), extracted with CH2CI2, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated in vacuo at 0°C and used directly in Step C.

Step C The product from Step B above was added to a slurry of NaBH4 (1.4 g) in isopropanol (50 mL) at 0°C, then the mixture was stirred at reflux for 8 hr and at room temperature for 48 hrs. Water was added and the mixture was stirred for 30 min, then extracted with diethyl ether, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was diluted with CH2CI2 and extracted with 3M HCI. The organic phase was discarded and the aqueous phase was basified with NaOH (aq) and extracted with CH2CI2. Drying over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtering, and concentration in vacuo gave the desired compound (0.5 g).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 96 0 0 0 S N. Boc Step A S Step B g 1-1-, 6f t 0 N, NH box O O Step C eNC S/N^/Step D g N w I 0 OH-ir O OH O OH Step A 2-Thiophenecarbonyl chloride (2. OmL, 18. 7mmol) was dissolved in 100mL dichloromethane. After addition of diisopropylethylamine (4. 1mL, 23. 4mmol) and Boc- piperazine (3.66g, 19. 7mmol), the mixture was stirred for 4h at room temperature.

The resulting mixture was put into water (500mL) and acidified with 3N HCI to pH-1.

Extraction with dichloromethane (2x100mL) and drying over sodium sulfate resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in the next step without any further purification.

1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 1.60 (s, 9H), 3.29 (dd, 4H), 3.69 (dd, 4H), 7.23 (dd, 1 H), 7.49 (d, 1 H), 7.79 (d, 1 H).

Step B The crude material from Step A was dissolved in trifluoroacetic acid/dichloromethane (75mL, 4/1). After stirring for 2h, the reaction mixture was put into 1 N sodium hydroxide (400mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x100mL) and drying over sodium sulfate resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in Step C without any further purification. 1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 2.81 (dd, 4H), 3.63 (dd, 4H), 7.21 (dd, 1 H), 7.46 (d, 1 H), 7.82 (d, 1 H).

Step C The crude material (3.50g, 17. 8mmol) from Step B was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL). After addition of diisopropylethylamine (18. 7mL, 107mol), 3-nitrosalicylic acid (3.3g, 18. 0mmol), and PyBrOP (10. 4g, 22. 3mmol), the resulting mixture was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into 1 N sodium hydroxide (200mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x200mL) removed all PyBrOP by-products. The aqueous phase was acidified with 3N HCI and subsequently extracted with dichloromethane (3x 100mL). The combined organic phases of the acidic extraction were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, and finally purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 10/1) to yield the desired product (2. 31g, 34 % over 3 steps).'H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.30- 3.90 (m, 8H), 7.10-8. 20 (m, double signals due to E/Z-isomers, 6H), 10. 82 (s, 1H).

Step D The nitro-compound (2.3g, 6. 4mmol) from Step C was dissolved in methanol (50mL) and stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere over night. The reaction mixture was filte ed through Celite and washed thoroughly with methanol.

Finally, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 10/1) to yield the desired product (1.78g, 84%). H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.30-3. 90 (m, 8H), 7.22 (m, 2H), 7.55 (d, 1 H), 7.71 (d, 1 H), 7.88 (d, 1 H), 8.15 (d, 1 H), 10.85 (bs, 1 H).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 97 0 0 0 OH + N'Boc Step A N N Stp g UN N-Boc Step (N_ C HN J 4'Boc l\/NH O O Step C N N/Step D N N I N02 I "N I NH2 O OH O OH

Step A Picolinic acid (3. 0g, 24. 3mmol) was suspended in SOC) 2 (15mL). After addition of dimethylformamide (5 drops), the reaction mixture was stirred for 4 hours.

Evaporation of the solvent yielded the corresponding acid chloride as HCI-salt.

Without any further purification, the solid was suspended in 120mL dichloromethane.

After addition of diisopropylethylamine (12. 7mL, 73mmol) and Boc-piparazine (4. 8g, 25. 5mmol), the reaction was stirred over night at room temperature. The resulting mixture was put into water (500mL) and extracted with dichloromethane (2x100mL).

Drying over sodium sulfate resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in Step B without any further purification. 1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 1.63 (s, 9H), 3.21 (dd, 4H), 3.61 (dd, 4H), 7.57 (dd, 1H), 7.63 (d, 1H), 7.98 (dd, 1H), 8.70 (d, 1 H).

Step B The crude material from Step A was dissolved in trifluoroacetic acid/dichloromethane (75mL, 4/1). After stirring for 2days, the reaction mixture was put into 1 N sodium hydroxide (400mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x100mL) and drying over sodium sulfate resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in Step C without any further purification. 1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 2.77 (dd, 2H), 2.83 (dd, 1 H), 3.38 (dd, 2H), 3.64 (dd, 1 H), 7.58 (dd, 1 H), 7.62 (d, 1 H), 8.00 (dd, 1 H), 8.67 (d, 1 H).

Step C The crude material (1.35g, 7. 06mmol) from Step B was dissolved in dichloromethane (50mL). After addition of diisopropylethylamine (3.7mL, 21. 2mmol), 3-nitrosalicylic acid (1.36g, 7. 41mmol), and PyBrOP (3.62g, 7. 77mmol), the resulting mixture was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into 1 N sodium

hydroxide (300mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x100mL) removed any PyBrOP products. The aqueous phase was acidified with 3N HCI. Adjustment of the pH with saturated sodium carbonate solution to almost neutral crushed the desired compound out of solution. The aqueous phase was subsequently extracted with dichloromethane (3x 100mL). The combined organic layers of the neutral extraction were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, and finally purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 20/1) to yield the desired product (1. 35g, 16% over 3 steps NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.30-3. 95 (m, 8H), 7.22 (m, 1H), 7.61 (m, 1H), 7.73 (d, 2H), 8.03 (m, 1H), 8.17 (m, 1H), 8.69 (m, 1H), 10.82 (s, 1H).

Step D The nitro-compound (1. 35g, 3. 79mmol) from Step C was dissolved in methanol (60mL) and stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere over night. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite and washed thoroughly with methanol.

Finally, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 20/1) to yield the desired product (1.10g, 89 %).'H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.50-3. 85 (m, 8H), 6.47 (dd 1H), 6.74 (m, 2H), 7.59 (dd, 1 H), 7.71 (d, 1 H), 8.04 (dd, 1 H), 8.68 (d, 1 H).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 98 0 0 Step A N Step B N H ' N nu jazz Ouzo Step C N Step D v SNV No 0 OH 0 OH Step A 1-Methyl-2-pyrrolecarboxylic acid (2. 5g, 20. Ommol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (50mL). After addition of PyBrOP (16. 3g, 35. 0mmol), diisopropylethylamine (14. 0mL, 73. Ommol) and Boc-piparazine (5. 5g, 30. 0mmol), the reaction was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into 1 N sodium

hydroxide (200mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x100mL) removed all PyBrOP by-products. The aqueous phase was acidified with 3N HCI. Adjustment of the pH with saturated sodium carbonate solution to almost neutral precipitated the desired compound. The aqueous phase was subsequently extracted with dichloromethane (3x 100mL). The combined organic phases of the neutral extraction were dried over sodium sulfate. Removal of the solvent resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in Step B without any further purification.'H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 1.59 (s, 9H) 3.21 (dd, 4H), 3.61 (dd, 4H), 3.74 (s, 3H), 6.11 (dd, 1 H), 6.33 (d, 1 H), 7.01 (d, 1H).

Step B The crude material from Step A was dissolved in trifluoroacetic acid/dichloromethane (75mL, 4/1). After stirring for 3h, the reaction mixture was put into 1N sodium hydroxide (400mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (3x100mL) and drying over sodium sulfate resulted in sufficiently pure product that was used in Step C without any further purification.'H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 2.79 (dd, 4H), 3.62 (dd, 4H), 3.76 (s, 3H), 6.11 (dd, 1H), 6.37 (d, 1H), 6.96 (d, 1H).

Step C The crude material (3.15g, 16. 3mmol) from Step B was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL). After addition of diisopropylethylamine (8.5mL, 49. 0mmol), 3-nitrosalicylic acid (3.13g, 17. 1 mmol), and PyBrOP (9. 11g, 19. 6mmol), the resulting mixture was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into 1 N sodium hydroxide (400mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x100mL) removed all PyBrOP products. The aqueous phase was then carefully acidified with 3N HCI until the color of the solution changes from orange to yellow and the desired compound crashed out of solution. The aqueous phase was subsequently extracted with dichloromethane (3x 100mL). The combined organic layers of the acidic extraction were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo to yield the desired product. 1H NMR (300MHz, d6- DMSO) 3.35-3. 85 (m, 8H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 6.13 (dd, 1H), 6.45 (d, 1H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 7.22 (dd, 1H), 7.70 (d, 1H), 8.16 (d, 1H), 10.83 (s, 2H).

Step D The crude nitro-compound from Step C was suspended in methanol (60mL) and stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere over night. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite and washed thoroughly with methanol. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 10/1) to yield the desired product (2. 61 g, 40 % for 4 steps NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.45-4. 80 (m, 8H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 6.17 (dd, 1H), 6.45 (m, 2H), 6.78 (m, 2H), 7.01 (d, 1 H).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 99 0 Boc 0 rNH dz ¢tSBr tN, Boc Step A N N J Step B N\ N J + O OH 0 OH Step N o 0 N NH2 Step C N N J /Step D --- NN k---- N,, NJ Step A 2-Bromopyridine N-oxide hydrochloride (1. 13g, 5. 37mmol) and Boc-piperazine (1. 50g, 8. 06mmol) were heated to 80° C in pyridine (10mL) over night. The reaction mixture was put into water (300mL) and then extracted with dichloromethane (2x100mL). The combined organic phases were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, and finally purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 10/1) to yield the desired product (500mg, 33 %).

'H NMR (300MHz, d-CDCI3) 1.60 (s, 9H), 3.46 (dd, 4H), 3.78 (dd, 4H), 6.99 (m, 2H), 7.37 (dd, 1 H), 8.33 (d, 1 H).

Step B The purified product (500mg, 1. 79mmol) was stirred for 30 min with 4N HCI/dioxane (15mL). Evaporation of the solvent yielded the crude amine (465mg) as multiple HCI-salt which was used in Step C without any further purification.

1H NMR (300MHz, d6-DMSO) 3.38 (m, 4H), 4.81 (m, 4H), 7.34 (dd, 1 H), 7.55 (d, 1 H), 7.86 (dd, 1 H), 8.55 (d, 1 H).

Step C The crude material (370mg, 1. 48mmol) from Step B was suspended in dichloromethane (20mL). After addition of diisopropylethylamine (2.6mL, 14. 8mmol), 3-nitrosalicylic acid (406mg, 2. 22mmol), and PyBrOP (1. 21 g, 2. 59mmol), the mixture was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into 1 N sodium hydroxide (50mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x50mL) removed all PyBrOP products. The aqueous phase was then carefully acidified (pH-4-5) with 3N HCI and extracted with dichloromethane (3x 50mL). The combined organic layers of the acidic extraction were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 10/1) to yield the desired product (330mg, 65%).

LCMS calculated: 344.1, found: (M+1) + 345. 1 Step D Sodium hydrosulfite (1.05g) was dissolved in water (3. 0mL) to yield a 1.5N solution. Addition of dioxane (3. 0mL) was followed by injection of conc. ammonium hydroxide (0.60mL, yields a 1. ON concentration). After addition of the nitro-compound (100mg, 0. 29mmol), the reaction mixture was stirred for 0.5h. Subsequently, the solvent was removed and the residue suspended in dichloromethane/methanol (10/1).

Filtration through Celite removed most of the salts. Final purification by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol = 5/1) yielded the desired product (68mg, 75%).

LCMS calculated : 314.14, found: (M+1) + 315.1 PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 100 Bn NH Ste B r N, Bn r NH - I HN J NI/ / 0 OH O OH N N02 NH2 Step D N Step C r I \ NI% NI/

Step A 4-Bromopyridine hydrochloride (3. 0g, 15. 4mmol) was dissolved in water (15mL). After addition of N-benzylpiperazine (14. 8mL, 85. Ommol) and 500mg copper sulfate, the reaction mixture was heated overnight to 140° C. The resulting product was extracted with ether (5x75mL), dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. Final purification by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol/NH40H = 10/1/0. 1) yielded the desired product (2.16g, 55%).'H NMR (300MHz, d-CDCI3) 2.68 (dd, 4H), 3.45 (dd, 4H), 6.76 (d, 2H), 7.40 (m, 5H), 8.38 (d, 2H).

Step B The benzylamine (2.16g, 8. 54mmol) from Step A, ammonium formate (2. 71g, 43. Ommol) and Pd (C) (10%, 1. 0g) was suspended in methanol (50mL) and refluxed for 3h. The palladium was filtered off and the filtrate was concentrated. The sufficiently pure product was used in Step C without any further purification. 1H NMR (300MHz, d-CDC13) 2.48 (bs, 1H), 3.13 (dd, 4H), 3.41 (dd, 4H), 7.78 (d, 2H), 8.39 (d, 2H).

Step C The crude material (1. 15g, 7. 06mmol) from Step B was dissolved in dichloromethane (50mL). After addition of diisopropylethylamine (4.7mL, 42. 4mmol), 3-nitrosalicylic acid (1.94g, 10. 6mmol), and PyBrOP (5.78g, 12. 3mmol), the resulting mixture was stirred over night at room temperature before being put into 1 N sodium hydroxide (300mL). Extraction with dichloromethane (2x100mL) removed all PyBrOP products. The aqueous phase was carefully acidified to pH-5-6 with 3N HCI and

extracted with dichloromethane (3x 100mL). The combined organic layers of the neutral extraction were dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated, and finally purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol/NH40H = 10/1/0. 1) to yield the desired product (850mg, 37% for 2 steps).

Step D The nitro-compound (850mg, 2. 59mmol) from Step C was dissolved in methanol (40mL) and stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere over night. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite and washed thoroughly with methanol. Finally, the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane/methanol/ NH40H = 10/1/0. 1) to yield the desired product (650g, 84 %). H NMR (300MHz, d6- DMSO) 3.40-3. 75 (bm, 8H), 6.49 (dd, 1 H), 6.76 (m, 2H), 6.93 (d, 2H), 8.28 (d, 2H).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 101 C02CH2CH3 C02CH2CH3 O BN-NH H Step 1 Bn- Step 2 N_Bn NH Br Step 1 N, N'-Dibenzyl-ethane-1, 2-diamine (20mL, 0. 0813mol), triethylamine (22.66mL, 0. 1626mol) and benzene (100mL) were combined in a round bottom flask. A solution of 2,3-dibromo-propionic acid ethyl ester (11. 82mL, 0. 0813mol) in benzene (50mL) was added dropwise. The solution was refluxed over night and monitored by TLC (20% ethyl acetate/hexane). The reaction was cooled to room temperature, then filtered and washed with benzene. The filtrate was concentrated then purified by column chromatography (15% ethyl acetate/hexane). The product was isolated as an oil (25.42g, 0. 0752mol, 92%). MS: calculated : 338.20, found: 339.2 'H Nl\ R (300 MHz, CDC13) 1.23 (t, 3H), 2.48 (m, 3H), 2.62 (m, 1H), 2.73 (m, 1H), 3.07 (m, 1H), 3.30 (m, 1H), 3.42 (d, 1H), 3.56 (m, 2H), 3.91 (d, 1H), 4.17 (m, 2H), 7.27 (m, 1 OH).

Step 2 In a Parr shaker vessel, the ester (25.43g, 0. 075mol) and methanol (125mL) were combined. The vessel was purged with argon and palladium catalyst (5% on carbon, 2.5g) was added. The system was shaken under an atmosphere of hydrogen overnight. TLC (20% ethyl acetate/hexane) indicated that reaction was complete.

The reaction mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite and washed with methanol.

The filtrate was concentrated and the product isolated as a solid (11. 7g, 0. 074mol, 98%).

MS: calculated : 158. 11, found: 159. 2 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.27 (t, 3H), 2.70 (m, 4H), 2.96 (m, 1H), 3.13 (dd, 1H), 3.43 (dd, 1H), 4.18 (m, 2H).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 102 Piperazine-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (3. 11g, 0. 0197mol), diisopropylethylamine (5.15mL, 0. 0296mol) and methylene chloride (200mL) were combined in a round bottom flask. While stirring at room temperature, a solution of N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl chloride (1. 81mL, 0. 0197mol) in methylene chloride (20mL) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred for one hour. After this time the reaction was concentrated and carried on to the next step without further purification.

(99% yield).

MS: calculated : 229.14, found: 230.1 H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.30 (t, 3H), 2.85 (s, 6H), 3.10 (m, 3H), 3.31 (m, 2H), 3.60 (m, 2H), 4.21 (q, 2H).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 103-104 Following the procedure described for Preparative Example 102, the Products listed in the table below were prepared using the commercially available chloride shown and piperazine-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester from Preparative Example 101. Example Chloride Product 1. Yield (%) 2. (M+1) + 103 O O 1. 99 ,, S-ci OEt 2. 237. 1 0 \. NH "IS-N 104,, 1. 62 104 1. 62 CI NOEt O OCH PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 105 Step 1 -I C C02CH2CH3 HO O Step 2 0 ) > \ \ SOH Step 3 t SN 7 N HN \N gN 02N v H2N (/\ NX 0 0 0"- 0

Step 1 3-Nitrosalicylic acid (3. 61 g, 0. 0197g), DCC (2.03g, 0. 0099mol) and ethyl acetate (130mL) were combined in a round bottom flask and stirred for 15min. 4- Dimethylcarbamoyl-piperazine-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (4. 51g, 0.0197g) was added, and the reaction was stirred for 72 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated then dissolved in dichloromethane. The organic phase was washed once with 0. 1 N sodium hydroxide. The aqueous phase was back extracted once with dichloromethane. The aqueous phase was acidified and wash three times with ethyl acetate. The aqueous phase was concentrated and purified by column chromatography (5% methanol/DCM).

MS: calculated : 394.15, found: 395.0 'H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.32 (t, 3H), 2.86 (m, 7H), 3.15 (m, 1H), 3.51 (m, 4H), 4.24 (m, 3H), 7.15 (m, 1H), 7.66 (m, 1H), 8.20 (m, 1H), 10.86 (bs, 1H).

Step 2 4-Dimethylcarbamoyl-1- (2-hydroxy-3-nitro-benzoyl)-piperazine-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (0.80g, 0. 002mol) and methanol (50mL) were combined in a round bottom flask. The system was purged with argon. To the solution was added 5% palladium on carbon (-100mg). The flask was purged with hydrogen and stirred overnight. The reaction was filtered through a pad of celite and washed with

methanol. The material was concentrated then purified by column chromatography (6% methanol/DCM). Isolated product (0.74g, 0. 002mol, 100%).

MS: calculated : 364.17, found: 365.1 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.27 (t, 3H), 2.85 (m, 8H), 3.18 (1H), 3.45 (m, 3H), 4.19 (m, 3H), 3.90 (m, 3H) Step 3 1- (3-Amino-2-hydroxy-benzoyl)-4-dimethylcarbamoyl-piperazine-2 -carboxylic acid ethyl ester (0.74g, 0. 002mol) was suspended in a solution of dioxane (10mL) and water (10mL). Lithium hydroxide (0.26g, 0.0061 mol) was added and the mixture stirred for two hours. The solution was acidified to pH=6 with 3N HCI then extracted with butanol. The extracts were combined, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated.

MS: calculated : 336.14, found: 337.1 1H NMR (300 MHz, CD30D) 2.86 (m, 7H), 3.23 (m, 3H), 3.54 (m, 3H), 6.92 (m, 2H), 7.23 (m, 1 H).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 106-107 Following the procedure described for Example 105, the Products listed in the table below were prepared using the amine from the Preparative Example indicated and 3-nitrosalacylic acid. Example Aniline Product 1. Yield (%) 2. (M+1) + 3. Note 106 103 1. 91 COH 2. Not observed N O H2N N -S//3. Rainey 0 nickel used in Step 2 107 104 1. 24 2. 360. 0 3. For Step 1 C02H used PyBrop/ N DIEA in DCM Zon -I0 L° O PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 108

Step A 3-Nitrosalicylic acid (1. 0g, 5. 5mmol) was dissolved in ethyl acetate (20mL).

1, 3-Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (0.568g, 2. 8mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for approximately 10 minutes and cooled to 0°C. During this time a precipitate formed. Azetidine (0.39mL, 5. 8mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred overnight and allowed to warm to room temperature. After this time the reaction was cooled to 0°C and filtered. The collected solid was washed with chilled ethyl acetate.

The filtrate was concentrated and purified by column chromatography (80% EtOAc/Hex) to give the product (476mg, 39.0%).

1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) #2. 40 (m, 2H), 4.38 (m, 4H), 6.97 (m, 1H), 7.62 (d, 1H), 8.12 (d, 1H), 12. 88 (m, 1H) ppm.

Step B The nitro compound (0. 48g, 2. 1 mmol) from Preparative Example 32 Step A was dissolved in methanol (25ml) and stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite, the filtrate concentrated in vacuo to give the product (344mg, 90%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, Ceci3) 52. 52 (m, 2H), 4.57 (bs, 4H), 6.75 (m, 1H), 6.90 (m, 2H), 12.71 (bs, 1H) ppm.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE109

In essentially the same manner as described in Preparative Example 108 above, the morpholino-amine product was obtained.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 110

Piperazine (4.9g, 0. 057mol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL). N, N'- Dimethylcarbamoyl chloride (1. OmL, 0. 011 mol) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for one hour. After this time 1 N potassium hydroxide (200mL) was added. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted three times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over sodium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product, without further purification, as an oil (1. 16g, 13%).

1H NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz) 1.95 (s, 1H), 2.83 (s, 6H), 2. 86 (m, 4H), 3.20 (m, 4H).

MS: calculated : 157.12, found: 158.1.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 111

Piperazine (4.9g, 0. 057mol) was dissolved in 1 N HCI (1 00mL). A solution of phenylsulfonylchloride (1.45mL, 0. 011 mol) in acetonitrile (25mL) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 30 minutes. After this time the reaction was extracted two times with ethyl acetate. The solution was then made basic with 1 N potassium hydroxide and extracted three times with dichloromethane. The dichloromethane fractions were combined and dried over

magnesium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product, without further purification, as a solid (1.22g, 9.4%).

'H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 2.94 (m, 8H), 7.56 (m, 3H), 7.76 (m, 2H).

MS: calculated : 226. 08, found: 227.1.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 112 Piperazine (4. 9g, 0. 057mol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL).

Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.85mL, 0. 011 mol) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 30 minutes. After this time 1 N potassium hydroxide (200mL) was added. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted three times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over sodium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product, without further purification, as a solid (1.07g, 11 %).

1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 1.75 (s, 1H), 2.78 (s, 3H), 2.97 (m, 4H), 3.20 (m, 4H).

MS: calculated : 164.06, found: 165. 1.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 113 Step A Boc-Piperazine (3. 0g, 0. 0161moi) was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL).

Propylisocyanate (1. 51mL, 0.0161 mol) was added to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for over night. After this time the reaction was diluted with 1 N potassium hydroxide (200mL) and extracted six times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over magnesium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product as a solid.

Step B The product of Step A above, was dissolved in a 30% trifluoroacetic acid/dichloromethane solution and stirred overnight. After this time a 1 N potassium

hydroxide solution (200 mL) was added to the reaction. The aqueous layer was extracted a total of six times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over sodium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product (1.37g, 50%).

1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 0.92 (t, 3H), 1.52 (m, 2H), 2.89 (m, 4H), 3.01 (s, 1H), 3.18 (m, 2H), 3.37 (m, 4H), 4.61 (bs, 1 H).

MS: calculated : 171.14, found: 172.0.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 114 Piperazine (4.9g, 0. 0569mol) was dissolved in 1 N HCI (70mL). A solution of phenylchloroformate (1.43mL, 0. 0114mol) in acetonitrile (25mL) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 30 minutes. After this time the reaction was extracted two times with ethyl acetate. The solution was then made basic with 1 N potassium hydroxide and extracted three times with dichloromethane. The dichloromethane fractions were combined and dried over magnesium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product, without further purification, as a solid (2.12g, 18%).

1H NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz) 1.78 (s, 1H), 2.91 (m, 4H), 3.59 (m, 4H), 7.11 (2H), 7.19 (m, 1 H), 7.36 (m, 2H).

MS: calculated : 206.24, found: 207.1.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 115-117 Following the procedure described for Example 112, the Products listed in the table below were prepared using the commercially available chloroformate shown and piperazine. Example Chloroformate Product 1. Yield (%) 2. (M+1) + 115 0 0 ci 0 rDN 0 1. 54 HNJ 2. 144. 9 116 O O ci Ao--\,,,, rN 1. 17 H N _, J 2. 173. 0 117 0 0 CI'O'\ NO^ \ . 69 HNJ 2. 173. 0 PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 118 0 BocN CiA 1. Step A <N Ph Ph 2. Step B HNJ

Step A Boc-Piperazine (3.01 g, 0.0161 mol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL) along with diisopropylethylamine (5. 61mL, 0. 0322mol). Benzoylchloride (1.87mL, 0. 0161mol) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for several hours. After this time the reaction was concentrated and the product was purified by column chromatography (10% MeOH/DCM). Boc-Protected product was isolated as a solid (5. 21g).

1H NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz) 1.47 (s, 9H), 3.45 (m, 8H), 7.41 (m, 5H).

MS: calculated: 290.16, found: 290.8.

Step B The product from Step A above, was dissolved in a 50% trifluoroacetic acid/dichloromethane solution and stirred overnight. After this time the reaction was diluted with 1 N potassium hydroxide (200mL) and the organic layer was separated.

The aqueous phase was then extracted six times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over magnesium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided product (2.93g). 1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 1.92 (s, 1 H), 2.87 (m, 4H), 3.52 (m, 4H), 7.39 (s, 5H).

MS: calculated : 190. 11, found: 191.1.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 119

o 0 111, 11 1. Step A Is \. NH)) \ ! u O 2. Step B HN J Step A Boc-Piperazine (3. 0g, 0. 0161 mol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (100mL) along with diisopropylethylamine (3. 1mL, 0. 0177mol). N, N'-dimethylsulfamoyl chloride (1.73mL, 0.0161 mol) was added dropwise to the solution at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for several hours. After this time the reaction was diluted with water (100mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted six times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over magnesium sulfate. Filtration and concentration provided the product, without further purification, as a solid (4.53g).

1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 1.47 (s, 9H), 2.84 (s, 6H), 3.21 (m, 4H), 3.48 (m, 4H).

MS: calculated : 293.14, found: 194.1 (M-Boc) +.

Step B The product from Step A above, was dissolved in a 30% trifluoroacetic acid/dichloromethane solution and stirred overnight. After this time the reaction was diluted with water and 1 N potassium hydroxide was used to make the aqueous layer slightly basic. The aqueous layer was extracted a total of seven times with dichloromethane. The organic fractions were combined and dried over sodium sulfate.

Filtration and concentration provided the product (2.96g).

'H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz) 2.03 (s, 1H), 2.83 (s, 6H), 2.92 (m, 4H), 3.23 (m, 4H).

MS: calculated : 193.09, found: 194.1.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 120 Step A

In essentially the same manner as that described in Preparative Example 105, Step 1, using 3-nitrobenzoic acid instead of 3-nitrosalicylic acid, the methyl ester product was prepared.

Step B The methyl ester (1.79g, 6. 1 mmol) from Step A above, was dissolved in dioxane/water (20mL/15mL) at room temperature. Lithium hydroxide (0.258g, 6. 2mmol) was added to the solution. After a few hours more lithium hydroxide was added (0. 128g, 3. Ommol) and the reaction was stirred for another hour. After this time the reaction was concentrated and then taken up in water. The solution was extracted two times with ether. The aqueous phase was then acidified and extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The organic fractions were then dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. Product was isolated by column chromatography (95% EtOAc/Hex, 0.05% HOAc) to give the product (1.66 g, 98%).

1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) 1.49 (m, 2H), 1.68 (m, 1H), 1.82 (m, 2H), 2.44 (m, 1H) 3.32 (m, 1H), 3.58 (m, 1H), 5.57 (m, 1 H), 7.65 (m, 1 H), 7.80 (m, 1H), 8.32 (m, 2H), 10.04 (bs, 1 Hppm).

Step C The nitro compound was dissolved in an excess of methanol (20mL) and covered by a blanket of argon. 5% Palladium on carbon was added (catalytic) and a hydrogen balloon was attached to the flask. The atmosphere of the system was

purged under vacuum and replaced with hydrogen. This step was repeated for a total of three times. The reaction was then stirred under hydrogen overnight. After this time the balloon was removed and the solution was filtered through celite followed by several rinses with methanol. The filtrate was concentrated and dried on the vacuum line to provide the desired aniline product (1.33 g, 90%).

1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCI3) 1.40 (m, 2H), 1.50 (m, 1H), 1.68 (m, 2H), 2.33 (m, 1H) 3.18 (m, 1H), 3.62 (m, 1H), 5.39 (m, 1H), 6.12 (bs, 2H), 6.75 (m, 2H), 7.12 (m, 1H) ppm.

Mass Spectra, calculated : 248, found: 249.1 (M+1) + PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 121-123 Following the procedure described in Preparative Example 120, but using the commercially available amine and benzoic acid indicated, the intermediate products in the table below were obtained. Prep Ex Carboxylic Amine Product 1. Yield Acid (%) 2. (M+1) + 3. Note 121 NO 1. 21 fY ' r-\ NH, 2. 251. 0 OH CN OH O' Yod HO 0'5-OH f"OH-N / : OH s CN 3. step NO 0-Skipped stop B 123 NO 1. 15 -NH2 2. 264. 0 OH OH 3 OH HO H OtN Skipped step B PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 124 nu2 NH2 N-H Step A HO2 Step B OH OU OH OH

Step A 3-Nitrosalicylic acid (500 mg, 2.7 mmol), 1, 3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) (563 mg) and ethyl acetate (10 mL) were combined and stirred for 10 min. (R)- (-)-2- pyrrolidinemethanol (0.27 mL) was added and the resulting suspension was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solid was filtered off and the filtrate was either concentrated down and directly purified or washed with 1 N NaOH. The aqueous phase was acidified and extracted with EtOAc. The resulting organic phase was dried over anhydrous MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the residue by preparative plate chromatography (silica gel, 5% MeOH/CH2CI2 saturated with AcOH) gave the desired compound (338 mg, 46%, MH+ = 267).

Step B The product from Step A above was stirred with 10% Pd/C under a hydrogen gas atmosphere overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite, the filtrate concentrated in vacuo, and the resulting residue purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 4% MeOH/CH2CI2 saturated with NH40H) to give the product (129mg, 43%, MH+=237).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 125-145 Following the procedure described for Preparative Example 124, but using the commercially available amine or the amine from the Preparative Example indicated and 3-nitrosalicylic acid, the products in the table below were obtained. Prep Ex Amine Product 1. Yield (%) Comm. Avail./ From Prep. Ex. 125 1. 37 Nu2 2. 298. 1 0 126 OH OH 1. 31 N/NH2 2. 310. 1 0 oh OH 127 O O NH2 1. 68 NH ~ XO OH 2. 294. 1 ou 128 ci ci ci ci 1. 54 NUA 2. 365. 9 N N 0 oh 0" 129 OQ OQ 1. 45 NH2 2. 316. 1 0 ou 0" 130 110 1. 59 2. 293. 1 OH zu N/---\ NH2 1. 32 0 N 2. 362. 0 0 PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 146 ruz O NTs Step A ¢p Step B a < I ; NTs 'NHTs 'NHyHCI

Step A To a solution of tosylaziridine (J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1998, 120, 6844-6845, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by refernce thereto) (0.5 g, 2.1 mmol) and Cu (acac) 2 (55 mg, 0.21 mmol) in THF (5 mL) at 0 °C was added PhMgBr (3.5 ml, 3.0 M in THF) diluted with THF (8 mL) dropwise over 20 min. The resulting solution was allowed to gradually warm to rt and was stirred for 12h. Sat. aq. NH4CI (5 mL), was added and the mixture was extracted with Et20 (3 x 15 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed with brine (1 x 10 mL), dried (MgS04) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude residue was purified by preparative TLC eluting with hexane/EtOAc (4: 1) to afford 0.57 g (86% yield) of a solid. The purified tosylamine was taken on directly to the next step.

Step B To a solution of tosylamine (0.55 g, 1.75 mmol) in NH3 (20 mL) at-78 °C was added sodium (0.40 g, 17.4 mmol). The resulting solution was stirred at-78 °C for 2 h whereupon the mixture was treated with solid NH4C1 and allowed to warm to rt.

Once the NH3 had boiled off, the mixture was partitioned between water (10 mL) and CH2CI2 (10 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (2 x10 mL). The organic layers were combined, ), dried (NaS04), and concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of ~20 mL. 4N HCI in dioxane (5 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 5 min. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the resultant crude residue was recrystallized from EtOH/Et2O to afford 0.30 g (87% yield) of a solid.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 147-156.10 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 146 but using the requisite tosylaziridines and Grignard reagents listed in the Table below, the following racemic amine hydrochloride products were obtained. Prep Ex. Tosyl aziridine Grignard Amine Yield (%) Reagent hydrochloride 147 MeMgBr Nos 'NH2HCI 148 EtMgBr/1 1. 56% (jNTs \., V'NHHCi 149 n-PrMgBr 1. 70% Nos -""NHz-HO 150 i-PrMgCI 1. 41 % Nos 'NH2 HCI 151 BnMgCl 1. 61% NH2 HCI "NHz-Hg 152 MeMgBr 0/1. 61 % CCNTS NH2 HCI EtMgBr 1. 66% 153 [NTs NHHa . i n-PrMgBr 0t/1. 80% 154 XNTS NH2 HCI i-PrMgBr 1. 27% 155 NTs ..'NH2-HCI IiNTs BnMgCI 156 U O'NH2-HCI 156. 1 agar 52 N T s H2N PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.11 Step A H HO CIH. H2N H/ H isomer A isomer B Step C Step B ir ir CIH. H2N'CIH. H2N'

isomer A isomer B Step A To a solution of the amine (118mg) from Preparative Example 148 in CH2CI2 (10ml) was added triethylamine (120ul), R-Mandelic Acid (164mg), DCC (213mg) and DMAP (8.8mg) and let stir for 40hr. The mixture was diluted with CH2CI2 and washed with saturated ammonium chloride, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by preparative plate chromatography (Hex/EtOAc 4: 1) to afford both isomers (A, 86mg, 45%) (B, 90mg, 48%).

Step B To isomer B (90mg) from above in dioxane (5ml) was added 6M H2SO4 (5ml).

The reaction was heated to 80°C over the weekend. 2M NaOH added to basify the reaction and extracted with ether. Ether layer washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was stirred in 4N HCI in dioxane for 30min, concentrated in vacuo and recrystallized in EtOH/ether to afford 55mg of product (98%).

Step C Isomer A (86mg) was reacted following the procedure set forth in Step B above to give the amine salt.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.12

The above nitro compound was reduced following the Preparative Example 2, Step B.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.13 To a solution of 1, 2-phenylenediame (1.5g) in CH2CI2 (30ml) at 0UC was added TEA (2.91 ml), followed by dropwise addition of MeSO2CI (1. 07ml). The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stir overnight. 1 M HCI added and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was adjusted to pH=11 with solid NaOH, extracted with CH2CI2. The basified aqueous layer was then neutralized using 3N HCI and extracted with CH2CI2, dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 1.8g of product (71 %).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.14 The above compound was prepared using the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 156.13, but using PhS02CI.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.15 The nitro compound was reduced following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 2, Step B.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.16 HO I Step A Step B Step A Ste B N2---- iN -- N 0 NH2 0 NH2 0 NH2 NH2 O NH2

Step A The known acid (410mg) above (J. Med. Chem. 1996,34, 4654, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto. ) was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step A to yield 380mg of an oil (80%).

Step B The amide (200mg) from above was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step B to yield 170mg of an oil (100%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.17 OH NH2 . 5te A g Step B'S S P S \ l \ \ l Step A To a solution of ketone (500mg) in EtOH/water (3: 1, 4ml) at room temperature was added hydroxylamine hydrochloride (214mg) followed by NaOH to afford a heterogenous mixture. The reaction was not complete so another equivalent of hydroxylamine hydrochloride was added and refluxed overnight. The reaction was cooled to 0°C and treated with 3N HCI and extracted with CH2CI2, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 500mg of product (92%).

Step B To a solution of oxime (300mg) in THF (5ml) at 0°C was added LiAIH4 (266mg) portionwise. The heterogenous solution was stirred at room temperature for 14hr and then refluxed for 8hr. The solution was cooled to 0°C and water, 2M NaOH, water and ether were added to the reaction. The mixture was filtered through a celite pad. The

filtrate was treated with 3N HCI. The aqueous layer was cooled to 0°C, basified with NaOH pellets and extracted with ether. The ether layer was dried over MgS04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford the product (143mg, 69%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.18 Step StepB Step A II Me NH2 H3COCOH > Oye OMe p NHS Step C g H3C0 S H3C0 Step A Methoxyacetic acid (14 mL) in CH2CI2 (120 mL) and cooled in an ice-water bath was treated with DMF (0.9 mL) and oxalyl chloride (21 mL). After stirring at RT overnight, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo and redissolved in CH2CI2 (120 mL).

N-methyl-N-methoxylamine (20 g) was added and the mixture stirred at RT overnight.

Filtration and concentration in vacuo afforded the desired amide (21 g, 89%).

Step B To a solution of the above amide (260mg) in THF (5ml) at-78 °C was added a solution of 2-thienyllithium (1 M in THF, 2. 15ml). The solution was stirred for 2hr at-78 °C and warmed to-20 °C for an additional 2hr. The reaction was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with CH2CI2, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 250mg of product (82%).

Step C The ketone from above (250mg) was reacted via the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 156.17 Steps A and B to yield 176 mg of the amine (79%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156. 19 OH NH2 S Step B CI C CI C'--Ct

Step A To a solution of 3-chlorothiophene (1. 16ml) in ether (20ml) at-10°C was added n-BuLi (2.5M in hexane, 5ml). After solution was stirred at-10 °C for 20min, propionaldehyde (0. 82ml) in ether (20ml) was added dropwise and let warm to room temperature slowly. The reaction was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and extracted with CH2CI2, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 1.37g of product (62%).

Step B The alcohol from Step A above was reacted via the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 75.75, Steps B and C to give the amine.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.20 OH BrStep A S Step N S Step C NH2 S s Step A To a solution of magnesium metal (360mg) in THF (1 5ml) at 0 °C was added 2- bromothiophene (1. 45ml) in THF (1 Oml) dropwise over 20min. The solution was warmed to room temperature for 3hr, recooled to 0 °C whereupon a solution of cyclopropylacetonitrile (1 g) in ether (30ml) was added dropwise via a syringe and let warm to room temperature and stir overnight. 3M HCI was added and washed with CH2Ci2 The aq « eous layer was basified with NaOH pellets and extracted with ether, dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 625mg of product (68%).

Step B The ketone was reacted via the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 156. 17 Step A to give the oxime.

Step C The oxime from above was reacted via the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 156.17 Step B to give the amine.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.21 0 0 0 Step A H3 O Step B _ CI N N /N \/N H3C0 3cl Step A N N Step A To a solution of CH30NHCH3. HCI (780mg) and acid chloride (1g) in CH2CI2 at 0 °C was added dry pyridine (1. 35ml) to afford a heterogenous mixture The solution was warmed to room temperature and stirred overnight. 1 M HCI was added to the reaction and the organic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 1 g of product (85%).

Step B To a solution of Etl (614ul) in ether (5ml) at-78°C was added t-BuLi (1.7M in pentane, 9ml) dropwise. The mixture was warmed to room temperature for 1 hr, cooled to-78°C where the amide (1 g) from Step A in THF (4ml) was added and allowed to warm to 0 °C for 2hr. 1 M HCI was added to the reaction and extracted with CH2CI2, washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 500mg of product (63%).

Step C To a solution of ketone (800mg) in THF/water (10: 1, 20ml) at 0°C was added sodium borohydride (363mg) portionwise. The solution was stirred for 2hr at 0 °C.

The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, the residue was dissolved in CH2CI2, washed with 1 N NaOH and brine, dried with Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 560mg of product (69%).

Step D The alcohol from above was reacted via the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 75.75, Steps B and C to give the amine (176mg, 59%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156.22 0 CN Step A Nua Step B -- \ Step A Cyclopropylacetonitrile (12 mmol) in Et2O (50 mL) at 0°C was treated with PhMgBr (14 mmol) and the mixture was stirred for 2 hrs at 0°C, then at RT overnight.

Hydrochloric acid (3 M) was added, and after stirring for an additional 12 hrs, the mixture was extracted with CH2CI2, washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and cor, centrated in vacuo to give the desired ketone (1.34 g, 70%).

Step B Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 156.20 Steps B and C, the amine was prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 156. 23

The above amine was prepared using the procedures set forth in WO 98/11064 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by refernce thereto. PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 157 , Step A (Step B aq O NH2 2 O NHS02Me /Step C 'N°2 i O NHS02Me O NHS02Me O NHS02Me O NHS02Me Step A By taking the known carboxylic acid (J. Med. Chem. 1996,39, 4654-4666, the disclosure of wnich is incorporated herein by refernce thereto) and subjecting it to the conditions outlined in Preparative Example 112, the product can be prepared.

Step B Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 2, Step A, except using dimethylamine and the compound from Step A above, the product can be prepared.

Step C Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 2, Step B, except using the compound from Step B above, the product can be prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 158

Following a similar procedure used in Preparative Example 157, Steps A-C, except using trifluoromethylsulfonylchloride in Step A above, the product can be prepared.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 200 0 0 0 y CHZCI : acetone Et0 Et0 \ N rt, 3h neo o OH ci out 'OH Neo

A solution of the known (J. Org. Chem, V 48, No: 6,1983, P 763-767) isothiazole dioxide intermediate (50mg, 0. 19mmol) and the phenolic amine from Preparative Example 3 (31 mg, 0. 19mmol) in a mixture of acetone and dichloromethane (2 mL, 1: 1) was stirred at room temperature for several hours.

Solvents were removed under reduced pressure; the residue was treated with acetone, precipitated product 3 was separated (20mg, 27%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 201 A solution of the known (J. Org. Chem, V 48, No: 6,1983, P 763-767) isothiazole dioxide intermediate (53mg, 0. 2mmol) and the commercially-available amine (28 1L, 0.2 mmol) in acetone (2 mL) was stirred at room temperature overnight.

Concentration in vacuo afforded the desired intermediate which was used directly.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 300-365 If one were to follow a procedure similar to that set forth in Preparative Example 200, but using the amines and the isothiazoledioxide intermediates from the Preparative Examples indicated in the Table below, the isothiazoledioxide intermediates could be obtained. Prep. Ex Prep Ex of Prep Ex of Product Amine Isothiazole- dioxide 300 3 22 EtO2C S'N NH OH ou /N, 301 1001 22 ON zo Et02C N F3C NH H 0== (oh 0 OH N, i 302 19 22 zu Etc N OH - N H X<') H" po 303 13. 32A 22 0"0 Et02C S N oh N OH H '-N OH PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.1 \ -Irq 1-1 i-q N02-9--N02 I NH2 0 OH eN H N OH

Step A By using the nitro-amide from Preparative Example 13.3, Step A, the amidine structure can be prepared following a similar procedure to that in Tetrahedron Lett., 2000,41 (11), 1677-1680 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by refernce thereto).

Step B By using the product from Step A and the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step B, one could obtain the desired amine-amidine.

ALTERNATE PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.2 I Step A i I\ N I Step B nos NO I 0 OMe/ OMe sitz MHz N _N02 OH/N OH / Step A By treating the nitro-amide from Preparative Example 13.3, Step B with POC13 and subsequently MeNH2, according to procedures known in the art, one would obtain the desired compound.

Step By treating the product from Step A according to the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.3, Step E, one could obtain the desired compound.

Step C By using the product from Step B and the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2 Step B, one would obtain the desired compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.3

Step A By following a similar procedure as that described in Zh. Obshch. Khim., 27, 1957,754, 757 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), but instead using 2, 4-dichlorophenol and dimethylphosphinic chloride, one would obtain the desired compound.

Step B By following a similar procedure as that described in J. Organomet. Chem.; 317,1986, 11-22 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), one would obtain the desired compound.

Step C By following a similar procedure as that described in J. Amer. Chem. Soc. , 77, 1955,6221 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), one would obtain the desired compound.

Step D By following a similar procedure as that described in J. Med. Chem. , 27,1984, 654-659 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), one would obtain the desired compound.

ALTERNATE PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.4

Step A By following a similar procedure as that described in Phosphorous, Sulfur Silicon Relat. Elem. ; EN; 61,12, 1991,119-129 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), but instead using 4-chlorophenol, one would obtain the desired compound.

Step B By using a similar procedure as that in Phosphorous, Sulfur Silicon Relat.

Elem. ; EN; 61,12, 1991,119-129 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), but instead using MeMgBr, the desired compound could be prepared.

Step C By following a similar procedure as that described in J. Amer. Chem. Soc. , 77, 1955,6221 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), one would obtain the desired compound.

Step D By following a similar procedure as that described in J. Med. Chem. , 27,1984, 654-659 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), one would obtain the desired compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500. 5

By following a similar procedure as that set forth in J. Org. Chem. 1998,63, 2824-2828 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), but using CH3CCMgBr, one could obtain the desired compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.6 g S S Step A 02N Step B 02N o\ °\ HO Step C S S Stop E ON \ I ----02N I Br Step D COH B MeO MeO HO Step F S 02N Step G 02N Step H H2N \ HO O HO Me0 O

Step A By following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.1, Step B using 3-methoxythiophene, one could obtain the desired product.

Step B By using the product from step A and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step E, the desired compound could be obtained.

Step C By using the product from Step B and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29, Step D, one could obtain the desired compound.

Step D By using the product from Step C and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.3, Step B, the desired compound could be obtained.

Step E By treating the product from Step D with n-BuLi at-78°C in THF and quenching the resulting anion with C02 according to standard literature procedure, one could obtain the desired compound following aqueous acid work up.

Step F By using the product from Step E and the procedure set forth in Prepartive Example 13.19, Step C, one could obtain the desired compound.

Step G By using the product from step F and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19, Step E, the desired compound could be obtained.

Step H By using the product from Step G and following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 2, Step B, the desired compound could be obtained.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.7 s_I s_I Step A \ Step B C02Me C02H HCI HO Step C zu 40L CL1< Step D Si O 0 H/' 2N I N 0 StepE 0\ H Step E I r H2N NH2 HO Step A If one were to use a similar procedure to that used in Preparative Example 13.3 Step B, except using the hydroxy acid from Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 6 (9), 1996,1043 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), one would obtain the desired methoxy compound.

Step B If one were to use a similar procedure to that used in Preparative Example 13.19 Step B, except using the product from Step A above, one would obtain the desired compound.

Step C If one were to use a similar procedure to that used in Synth. Commun. 1980, 10, p. 107 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), except

using the product from Step B above and t-butanol, one would obtain the desired compound.

Step D If one were to use a similar procedure to that used in Synthesis, 1986,1031 (the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto), except using the product from Step C above, one would obtain the desired sulfonamide compound.

Step E If one were to use a similar procedure to that used in Preparative Example 13.19 Step E, except using the product from Step D above, one would obtain the desired compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.8 0 0 - Step A N S \ S % N o NH \,H i 'H Step B 0'/0 \ \nu I HO NH2 Step A If one were to treat the product from Step C of Example 1125 with BuLi (2.2 eq. ) in THF followed by quenching of the reaction mixture with N, N,-dimethylsulfamoyl chloride (1.1 eq. ) then one would obtain Step B If one were to use the product of Step A above and follow Step E of Preparative Example 500.7, then one would obtain the title compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 500.9 0 s I ° S I oy Steps Step A S \ Step B cl Stem C step C Step C - N ---/\ I SteP D S bu \ HO HO HO HO Step F Ph °+S Ph 0 s N\N Ph N/NH2 HO Step A To a solution of 3-methoxythiophene (3 g) in dichloromethane (175 mL) at - 78°C was added chlorosulfonic acid (8.5 mL) dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 15 min at-78°C and 1.5 h at room temp. Afterwards, the mixture was poured carefully into crushed ice, and extracted with dichloromethane. The extracts were washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered through a 1-in silica gel pad.

The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound (4.2 g).

Step B The product from Step A above (4.5 g) was dissolved in dichloromethane (140 mL) and added with triethylamine (8.8 mL) followed by diethyl amine in THF (2M, 21 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was washed with brine and saturated bicarbonate (aq) and brine again, dried over

sodium sulfate, filtered through a 1-in silica gel pad. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give the desired compound (4.4 g).

Step C The product from Step B above (4.3 g) was dissolved in dichloromethane (125 mL) and cooled in a-78°C bath. A solution of boron tribromide (1.0 M in dichloromethane, 24.3 mL) was added. The mixture was stirred for 4 h while the temperature was increased slowly from-78°C to 10°C. H2O was added, the two layers were separated, and the aqueous layer was extracted with dichloro-methane.

The combined organic layer and extracts were wahed with brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give 3.96 g of the desired hydroxy-compound.

Step D The product from step C above (3.96 g) was dissolved in 125 mL of dichloromethane, and added with potassium carbonate (6.6 g) followed by bromine (2 mL). The mixture was stirred for 5 h at room temperature, quenched with 100 mL of H20. The aqueous mixture was addjusted to pH-5 using a 0.5N hydrogen chloride aqueous solution, and extracted with dichloromethane. The extracts were washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and filtered through a celite pad. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford 4.2 g of the desired bromo-compound.

Step E The product from Step D (4.2 g) was dissolved in 100 mL of acetone and added with potassium carbonate (10 g) followed by iodomethane (9 mL). The mixture was heated to reflux and continued for 3.5 h. After cooled to room temperature, the mixture was filtered through a Celite pad. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to a dark brown residue, which was purified by flash column chromatography eluting with dichloromethane-hexanes (1: 1, v/v) to give 2.7 g of the desired product.

Step F The product from step E (2.7 g) was converted to the desired imine compound (3 g), following the similar procedure to that of Preparative Example 13.19 step D.

Step G The imine product from step F (3 g) was dissolved in 80 mL of dichloromethane and cooled in a-78°C bath. A solution of boron tribromide (1.0 M in dichloromethane, 9.2 mL) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 4.25 h from-78°C to 5°C.

H20 (50 mL) was added, and the layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer and extracts were combined, washed with brine, and concentrated to an oily residue. The residue was dissolved in 80 mL of methanol, stirred with sodium acetate (1.5 g) and hydroxyamine hydrochloride (0.95 g) at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture was poured into an aqueous mixture of sodium hydroxide (1.0 M aq, 50 mL) and ether (100 mL). The two layers were separated. The aqueous layer was washed with ether three times. The combined ether washings were re-extracted with H20 once. The aqueous layers were combined, washed once with dichloromethane, adjusted to pH-6 using 3.0 M and 0.5 M hydrogen chloride aqueous solutions, and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic extracts were combined, washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo to give 1.2 g of desired amine compound.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 600 Et0 S step A Et s-Ph step B Et s Ph NH2 stem C I step C Ph step D HO N-- N n MeO MeO Step A Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19 Step D, the imine was prepared from the known bromoester (1. 0g) to yield 1. 1g (79%) as a yellow solid.

Step B The product of Step A (0.6g) was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19 Step E to give the amine product 0. 19g (64%).

Step C The product of Step B (1. 0g) was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19 Step B to give the acid as yellow solid 0.9g (94%).

Step D The product of Step C (0.35g) was reacted following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.19 Step E to give the amino acid as yellow solid 0.167g (93%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 601 I step A 0 MeO ß oH y 0 o Step A To a solution of 2-methyl furan (1.72g) in ether was added BuLi (8.38mL) at - 78°C and stirred at room temperature for half an hour. The reaction mixture again cooled to-78°C and quenched with cyclopropyl amide 1 and stirred for two hours at - 78°C and slowly warmed to room temperature. The reaction mixture stirred for three hours at room temperature and quenched with the addition of saturated ammonium chloride solution. The mixture was taken to a separatory funnel, washed with water, brine and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtration and removal of solvent afforded the crude ketone, which was purified by using column chromatography to afford the ketone 3. 0g (87%) as a pale yellow oil.

Step B To a solution of ketone (1. 0g) from Step A above in THF (5. 0mL) at 0°C was added R-methyl oxazoborolidine (1. 2MI, 1 M in toluene) dropwise followed by addition of a solution of borane complexed with dimethyl sulfide (1.85mL, 2M in THF). The reaction mixture was stirred for 30minutes at 0°C and than at room temperature for

one hour. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0°C and MeOH was added carefully.

The mixture was stirred for 20 minutes and was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was extracted with ether, washed with water, 1 M HCI (1 OmL), saturated sodium bicarbonate (10. 0mL) water and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and removal of solvent afforded the crude alcohol which was purified by silica gel chromatography to afford the pure alcohol 0. 91 g (91 %) as yellow oil.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 601. A I ste'A step B O Me0 p ou Step A If one were to follow the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 601, but using the cyclopentylamide instead of the cyclopropylamide (prepared according to standard procedures), then one would obtain the desired alcohol.

Step B If one were to follow the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.25, but instead using the alcohol from Step A above, then one would obtain the title amine.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 601. B + I step A step B 0 0 Meo"N- O Me0 H2N ou Step A If one were to follow the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 601. A, but using 4-isopropylfuran instead of 5-methylfuran, then one would obtain the desired alcohol.

Step B If one were to follow the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.25, but instead using the alcohol from Step A above, then one would obtain the title amine.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 602 o o step A o o I v o, o step B r OH

Step A An equimolar mixture of 2-methylfuran (1. 0g) and anhydride (2.6g) was mixed with SnCl4 (0.05mL) and heated at 100°C for 3 hours. After cooling the reaction mixture, water (10mL) was added, followed by saturated sodium carbonate solution until it becomes alkaline. The reaction mixture was extracted with ether several times and the combined ether layer was washed with water, brine and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtration and removal of solvent afforded the crude ketone, which was purified by using silica gel chromatography to afford the ketone 0.9g (43%) as a yellow oil.

Step B The title alcohol was obtained following a similar procedure set forth in the Preparative Example 601.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 603 To a solution of 5-methyl furan-2-aldehyde (1. 0g) and 3-bromo-3,3- difluoropropene (2.24g) in DMF (30mL) was added indium powder (1.66g) and lithium iodide (50. 0mg). The reaction mixture was stirred over night, diluted with water and

extracted with ether. The ether layer was washed with water, brine and purified by silica gel chromatography to afford the pure alcohol 2.8g (92%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 603A-603F If one were to follow the procedure of Preparative Example 64, using the aldehydes, amino alcohols and organolithiums in the Table below, then the optically pure amine Products in the Table below would be obtained. Prep Aidehyde Amino Alcohol Organolithium Product Ex. 603A Q iPrLi A 0 H2N. OH (see Preparative Example 1004B) 603B H f H N/OH H2N'3 603B tBuLi 0 H O :. H 0 0 zon /N N N / 603C tBuLi 0 Q-1 0 HNOH HzN IO H2N OH zon \ 603D O BuLi H H2N 0 X 1 T (see Preparative Example 1004B) 603E iPrLi H b'"s H2N OH/, S (see preparative example 1002B) 603F 0 iPrLi -, HZN s H2N OH t

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 604-611 Following a similar procedure set forth in Preparative Examples 13.25 or 601 the following Alcohols were prepared. Prep Furan Electrophile Alcohol Yield Ex 604 CHO 86% zozo F 605 F 69% p/COOEt Ho 0 zu

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 620-631 Following a similar procedure to that set forth in Preparative Example 13.25 the following Amines were prepared from the corresponding Alcohols. Prep Ex ALCOHOL AMINE % YIELD CF3 CF3 620 Hp I O H2N I O 28 // 621 HO 0 H2N 0 58 //0 622 69 its 622 69 HO ~ H2N ive _ 623 HO W H2N//0 - F F F F 624 82 HO U H2N 0 f < t I 625 45 Ho han HO 0 H2N 626 HO O H2N O Preparative Example 1001 Step A Step B OMe OMe F3C-p-OMe Step C i Stop C Step C B, ON02 Step E Br-N02 Step D r' F3C OH F3C OMe CONMe2 CONMe2 CONMe2 -NHo NH2 Step F HBr F3C OH CONMe2

Step A Oxalyl chloride (3 mL, 34.27 mmol) was added dropwise to a mixture of 2- methoxy-6- (trifluoromethyl) benzoic acid (1.5 g, 6.81 mmol) (prepared according to known method, see: EP0897904B1), N, N-dimethylformamide (0.3 mL), and dichloromethane (40 mL) with stirring at rt. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight.

Evaporation of solvent and excess oxalyl chloride and drying under vacuum afforded 2-methoxy-6- (trifluoromethyl) benzoyl chloride as a solid, which was used without purification.

Step B A solution of 2-methoxy-6- (trifluoromethyl) benzoyl chloride (ca. 6.81 mmol) from Step A above in dichloromethane (20 mL) was added dropwise to a mixture of 4- (dimethylamino) pyridine (42 mg, 0.34 mmol), triethylamine (2.8 mL, 20.09 mmol), and 2 M dimethylamine solution in tetrahydrofuran (7 mL, 14 mmol), and dichloromethane (30 mL) with stirring at rt. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight. A mixture of dichloromethane and water was added. The organic phase was separated, washed with 1 N HCI solution, water, and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution and concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography (ethyl acetate: hexanes, 3: 1 v/v) to give the product as a white solid (1.24 g, 74% over two steps).

Step C A mixture of the amide from Step B above (1.8 g, 7.28 mmol), carbon tetrachloride (25 mL), and iron powder (305 mg, 5.46 mmol) was cooled to 0 °C.

Bromine (0.94 mL, 18.34 mmol) was added dropwise with stirring. After addition, the mixture was stirred at rt for 1 h and at 50 °C for 3 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, diluted with dichloromethane, and slowly poured to a cold 10% NaHS03 solution. After stirring at rt for 0.5 h, the organic layer was separated and concentrated to give the product as a white solid (2.26 g, 95%).

Step D Concentrated sulfuric acid (10 mL) was added dropwise to a flask charged with the bromide from Step C above (600 mg, 1.84 mmol) at 0 °C with stirring. A mixture of nitric acid (0.2 mL, 4.76 mmol) and concentrated sulfuric acid (0.3 mL) was then added dropwise. After addition, the mixture was stirred at rt for 3 h. The mixture was added to ice-water, neutralized with 15% NaOH solution to pH 7, and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was concentrated to give the product as a white solid (621 mg, 91 %). mp 92 °C, m/e 371 (MH+).

Step E A solution of the compound from Step D above (1.2 g, 3.23 mmol) in dichloromethane (50 mL) was cooled to-75 °C. 1 M BBr3 solution in dichloromethane (7.5 mL, 7.5 mmol) was added dropwise with stirring. The mixture was stirred at-75 °C for 2 h. The mixture was added to ice-water. After stirring at rt for 0.5 h, the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic was concentrated and the residue was purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane-methanol, 9: 1 v/v) to give the product as a yellow solid (1.05 g, 91 %). m/e 357 (MH+).

Step F A mixture of the compound from Step E above (1. 08 g, 3.02 mmol), methanol (30 mL), and 10% Pd-C (250 mg) was subjected to hydrogenation at 50 psi at rt for 6 h. The mixture was filtered through a layer of Celite. The filtrate was concentrated to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (930 mg, 96%). mp 132 °C, m/e 249.

Preparative Example 1002 s Step A Step B HO ph ph Bu HO ph Ph Step C s 0 s Step D / 41, Ph Ph

Step A To a cooled (-70°C) etherial (45 mL dry) solution of 3-bromothiophene (3.8 mL) was added BuLi (30 mL of 1.6M in hexane) dropwise, and the mixture was stirred at- 70°C for 20 min. Acetophenone (4.6 mL) in ether (6 mL) was added dropwise with stirring at-70°C. After 3 hrs, the mixture was warmed to RT and sat. NH4CI (aq) was added and the mixture was extracted with ether. The organic phase was dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound which was used in Step B without further purification.

Step B The crude product from Step A above was stirred with oxalic acid (0.375 g) at 70°C under reduced pressure for 3 hr, then cooled to RT and extracted with ether.

The organic phase was dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a pale yellow liquid (5.7 g, 78% for Steps A-B).

Step C To the product from Step B above (4.2 g) diluted with dichloromethane (30 mL) and containing triethylsilane (6 mL) was added TFA (3 mL) in dichloromethane (7.5 mL). After stirring at RT for 10 min, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a colorless liquid (4.61 g, 80%).

Step D To an etherial (3.5 mL dry) solution of the thiophene product (1.5 g) from Step C above was added BuLi (3.2 mL of 2.5M), and the mixture was heated at reflux for 15 min, cooled to RT, and DMF (0.8 mL) in ether (3.5 mL) was added dropwise. After stirring for 30 min, sat. NH4CI (aq) was added and the mixture was extracted with ether. The organic phase was dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound (1.71 g, 98%).

Preparative Example 1002B Step A I Step B - Br HO Step C S D 0 X Sep D H Step A Following the procedure described in Preparative Example 1002, Step A, but using acetone instead of acetophenone, 2-thiophen-3-yl-2-propanol would be obtained.

Step B, C, D Following the procedures described in Preparative Example 1002, steps B to D, the product from step A above would be converted to the titled 4-isopropyl-2-thiophen- aldehyde.

Preparative Example 1003 0 0 Step A 0 Step B 0 0 30 MeOzC MeOzC HOC 0-0 Step C 0 I Step D/0 N N _ O O

Step A The aldehyde (0.50 g) was combined with ethylene glycol (1 mL), benzene (40 mL) and pTSA monohydrate (30 mg) and stirred at reflux for 20 hr. Cool to room temperature, add EtOAc and sat. NaHC03 (aq) solution, separate the organic phase, concentrate in vacuo, and purify by silica gel chromatography (EtOAc-Hex, 1: 4) to give a colorless liquid (60 mg) Step B The product from Step A above (0.607 g) was stirred at 45°C overnight with 1 N NaOH (aq), then cooled to room temperature, acidified with 3N HCI and extracted with EtOAc. Washing with brine and concentration in vacuo gave a solid (5.0 g).

Step C Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 1, except using the product from Step B above and dimethylamine in THF (2M), the product was obtained (1. 21g crude).

Step D The product from Step C above was dissolved in THF and stirred with 0.3N HCI (aq) and stirred at RT for 4 hr. Concentration in vacuo gave a pale yellow oil (1.1 g, 67%).

Preparative Example 1004 OH O CO H Step A/I Step B/ MeO MeO MeO

Step A To a cooled (-78°C) solution of methoxybenzofuran-2-carboxylic acid (1 g) was added DIBAL (30 mL, 1 M in THF). After stirring for 20 min, the mixture was warmed to RT and stirred for 4 hr, then poured into sat. NH4CI (aq) (35 mL). After stirring at RT for 20 min, 6M HCI (aq) was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc, the organic phase dried and then concentrated in vacuo. Purification by silica gel chromatography (EtOAc-hexane, 3: 7) afforded the alcohol as a solid (0.4 g, 97%).

Step B A mixture of the product from Step A above (0.9 g), EtOAc (50 mL) and Mn02 (5.2 g) was stirred at RT for 22 h, then filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The solid was redissolved in EtOAc (50 mL), Mn02 (5.2 g) was added and the mixture was stirred for 4 additional hrs. Filtration, concentration and silica gel purification (EtOAc- Hexane, 1: 3) gave the title compound as a solid (0.60 g, 67%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 1004A o 0 0 Ste A Jl ° NO2 Step A) t O Step B H3COX H3CO), 3 0 o Step CHO 0 Step D H 0 Step A To a stirred solution of potassium t-butoxide (2.5g) in HMPA (20mi) was added 2-nitropropane (2ml) dropwise. After 5min, a solution of methyl-5-nitro-2-furoate (3.2g) in HMPA (8ml) was added to the mixture and stirred for 16hr. Water was added and the aqueous mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The EtOAc layer was washed with water, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material

was purified by flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 6: 1) to yield 3.6g of product (90%).

Step B To a solution of product from Step A (3.6g) in toluene (16ml) was added tributyltin hydride (5. 4moi) followed by AIBN (555mg). The mixture was heated to 85°C for 3.5hr. After cooling, the mixture was separated by flash column chromatography (Hex/EtOAc, 7: 1) to afford 2.06g of product (73%).

Step C To a solution of product from Step B (2.05g) in THF (60ml) at 0°C was added a solution of LAH (1 M in ether, 12. 8mi). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 30min. Water and 1 M NaOH was added until a precipitate formed, diluted with EtOAc, stirred for 30min and then filtered through a celite pad. The organic filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 1.56g of product (93%).

Step D To a solution of product from Step C (2.15g) in CH2CI2 (100ml) was added Dess-Martin oxidant (7.26g) in CH2CI2 (45mut) and stirred for 30min. The mixture was diluted with ether (200moi). The organic layer was washed with 1 N NaOH, water and brine, dried with MgS04, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give oil and solid. The material was extracted with ether and filtered. Some solid crystallized out from the filtrate, filtered again, and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 2.19g of product.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 1004B ? 0 0 0 0 Br Step A 0 Step B 0 Et0 Et0 o Step C HO Step D HO Step E _H)'-0/

Step A To a suspension of 5-bromo-2-furoic acid (15g) in CH2CI2 (275moi) at room temperature was added oxalyl chloride (6. 9ml) followed by a catalytic amount of N, N'- dimethylformamide (0.3ml). The mixture was stirred for 1 hr, whereupon, EtOH (20moi) and TEA (22ml) were added and then let stir overnight. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo and extracted with hexanes and hexanes/CH2CI2. The extracts were concentrated in vacuo to give an oil (17. 2g, 93%).

Step B The product from Step A (17. 2g), aluminum trichloride (19. 52g) and carbon disulfide (150mi) were combined in a flask. A solution of n-octadecyl bromide (24.4g) in carbondisulfide (50moi) was added dropwise over 45min. The reaction was stirred for 2.5hr, whereupon, 300ml of crushed ice and water were added. The layers were separated and the organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, water, and brine. The organic layer was dried with Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash column chromatography (hexanes/ CH2Cl2, 3: 1) to yield 7. 91 g of product (37%).

Step C To the product from step B (7.9g) in THF (140ml) at-10°C was added a solution of LAH (1 M in THF, 28. 5ml). The solution was stirred for 2.5hrs at 15°C.

Water and 1 M NaOH were added carefully to the mixture, followed by EtOAc and let stir for 1.5hr. The reaction was filtered through a silica pad and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to yield 6. 48g of crude product (100%).

Step D The product from Step C (6.32g) was dissolved in THF (140mol) and cooled to -78°C. A solution of t-BuLi (2.5M in hexanes, 22ml) was added dropwise and let stir for 15min. An excess of water (70ml) was then added and let the reaction stir another hour. CH2CI2 (300moi) and brine (50ml) were added and the layers were separated.

The organic layer was dried with Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give 5. 33g of crude product.

Step E To a solution of the product from Step D (5. 33g) in CH2CI2 (1 00ml) was added a solution of Dess-Martin periodinane in CH2CI2 (15wt%, 12. 6g). The mixture was stirred for 1.5hr and then diluted with ether (400ml) and washed with 1 N NaOH, water and brine. The organic layer was dried with Na2SO4 and filtered through a magnesium sulfate/silica pad. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and purified via flash column chromatography (hex/EtOAc, 50: 1,25 : 1) to yield 3. 06g of an oil (74%).

Preparative Example 1005

C02H Step A H Step B0 0 --- \//\H CI Cp'CI

Following a similar procedure as that described in Preparative Example 1004, except using 5-chlorobenzofuran-2-carboxylic acid (1.5 g), the title compound was obtained (solid, 0.31 g, 24%).

Preparative Example 1006 Step A S Step B Cl02S X, PhO2S X > PhO2S<NH2 MeO MeO HO

Step A The sulfonyl chloride from Preparative Example 13.29 Step A (1.5 g) was stirred with AIC13 and benzene for 15 min at 20 °C. Treatment with NaOH, extraction with Et20, concentration in vacuo, and purification by column chromatography (silica, hexane-EtOAc, 5: 2) gave the phenylsulfone (1. 5g, 84%, MH+ = 255).

Step B Following similar procedures as those used in Preparative Example 13.29 Steps C-G, except using the sulfone from Step A above, the title compound was prepared (0.04 g, 27%, MH+ = 256).

Preparative Example 1030

Step A The product of Preparative Example 34.18 Step B (2 g, 8 mmol) was stirred with morpholine (0.9 mL, 10.29 mmol) and K2CO3 (2.2 g, 15.9 mmol) in 50 mL of acetone at RT to obtain the morpholinobutylfuran derivative (1.22 g, 73%).

Step B Following a similar procedure as that in Preparative Example 34.18 Step D, but using the product (1.2 g) from Step A above, the title aldehyde was prepared (0.9 g, 66%, 1: 0.7 regioisomeric mixture).

Preparative Example 1030-A Following a similar procedure as that in Preparative Example 1030 Steps A-B, but using N-methylpiperazine instead of morpholine, the title aldehyde could be prepared.

Preparative Example 1030-B Following a similar procedure as in Preparative Example 1030 Steps A-B, but using N, N-dimethylamine instead of morpholine, the title aldehyde could be prepared.

Preparative Example 1031

0 Br>< (1) tert-BuLI HX O O (2) DMF A solution of 5-bromobenzofuran (950 mg, 4.82 mmol) in anhydrous ether (12 mL) was cooled to-78 °C. 1.7 M tert-BuLi solution in pentane (6 ml, 10.2 mmol) was added dropwise under argon. After addition, the mixture was stirred at-78 °C for 20 min, followed by addition of a mixture of DMF (0.8 mL) and ether (1 mL). The mixture was allowed to warm to rt and stirred for 0.5 h. Ethyl acetate was added. The mixture was poured to saturated ammonium chloride solution. The organic layer was separated and concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography (ethyl acetate-hexanes, 1: 5 v/v) to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid (490 mg, 70%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1040-1054 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 64 but using the commercially available (or prepared) aldehyde, aminoalcohols, and organolithium reagents in the Table below, the optically pure amine products in the Table below were obtained. Prep. Aldehyde Amino Organo-Product 1. Yield (%) Ex. Alcohol lithium 2. (M+1) + 1040 EtLi 1. 24% 0/ 2. 267 z HX H2N OH H2N\ nez zon CN/)

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1100-1126 Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 34 but using the commercially available aldehydes and Grignard/Organolithium reagents listed in the Table below, the amine products were obtained. Prep. Ex. Aldehyde Organo-metallic Product 1. Yield (%) Reagent 2. (M+1) + 1100 t-BuLi 1. 83% 0 2. 190 (M-16) Hm ß vNMe2 H2N \ NMe2 1108 t-BuLi 1. 31% H) 03 zOMe H N, OMe O 2. 224 OMe OMe Orme/ OMe 1109 t-BuLi 1. 11% 0 2. 224 H 0 ° H2N (Xy o 0 I 1110 t-BuLi 1. 57% 2. 224 H 0 han ou ou t-BuLi 1. 21% 0 \/2. 224 p 2. 224 H \ O ou 1112 c-Pentyl-Li 1. 58% 2. 190 H HAN 1113 t-BuLi 1. 20% 0 2. 248 OCF3 H N OCF3

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1200A-1204A Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 13.29 but using the commercially available amines, the hydroxyaminothiophene products listed in the Table below were obtained. Prep. Amine Product 1. Yield (%) Eux. 1200A 1. 3% H O O S 2. 342 NBS NH Nos N H N N N c OH Nd WN 1201 AT41% 0 2. 265 ON. N s 0 nu2 OO NH2 HO HO 1202A 1. 17% 2. 237 \, N\ N/\ /u 0_ ho HO HO 1203A 1. 1% N\H N s H @ O %/NH HO oor" HO

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 1205A 0 0 s-Step A s- Brui N Bn HO NH2 HO NH2 HO NH2 HONHz Step A Dibenzylsulfonamide-thiophene-amine (660 mg, 1.76 mmol), available from Preparative Example 1204A, was stirred with 4 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid at room temperature for 5 h. Ice water (50 mL) was added. The aqueous mixture was adjusted to pH-5 using a 1.0 M NaOH aqueous solution, and extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL x 4). The organic extracts were washed with H20 and brine, dried over MgS04, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to yield 237 mg of the desired sulfonamide amine (69 %, MH+ = 194.23, [M-NH2] += 178).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1300 The title compound from Preparative Example 13.32 (0.35 g) was treated with concentrated sulfuric acid (3 mL) for 6 hrs, then poured on ice, and the pH adjusted to 4 with NaOH. Extraction with EtOAc, and drying of the organic phase over Na2SO4 gave the title compound (159 mg, 64%, MH+ = 223).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1301 F F \Z- Step A Step B 0 Ho zou

Step A Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 605 but using the commercially available fluoroisopropylester, the alcohol product was obtained (1.2 g, 84%, M-OH = 155).

Step B Following the procedure set forth in Preparative Example 625 but using the alcohol from Step A above, the amine product was obtained (350 mg, 35%, M-NH2 = 155).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1302 N02 NO2 OMe Step A OMe i i CI SO2CI Cl//\\ O O 00 Step B NH2 N02 OH Step C OH S. N Cl/S-N - ouzo 0'0 0 0 Step A Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 13.29 Step B, except using the commercially available arylsulfonylchloride (0.15 g) and diethylamine (2.2 eq), the dimethylsulfonamide was obtained (0.12 g, 71%, MH+ = 323).

Step B Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 13.29 Step C, except using the product from Step A above (0.12 g), the phenol was obtained (0. 112 g, 98%).

Step C Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 10.55 Step C, except using the product from Step B above (0.112 g), the title compound was obtained (0.1 g, 99%, MH+ = 245).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1303 Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 1302 Steps A-C, except using piperidine in Step A (0. 078 g) instead of diethylamine, the title compound was obtained (0.070 g, 35%, MH+ = 257).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1304 Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 1302 Steps A-C, except using dimethylamine (2M in THF) in Step A instead of diethylamine, the title compound was obtained (1.92g, 72%, MH+ = 217).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1304A

Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 1302 Steps A-C, except using morpholine in Step A instead of diethylamine, the title compound could be obtained.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1304B Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 1302 Steps A-C, except using N-methylamine in Step A instead of diethylamine, the title compound could be obtained.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1305 I X Step A {NOMe Step B f WNsH geh OMe OMe 0 OMe OMe Step C Br Br Br Step E ---' 1 Step D (\ /N. Me O2N. N. H - N. H OMe OMeO Br Step F 02N Me0 N Me 02N IOMe N, H 10 Step D OMe N, H Br Sep G Step GON JWN OH O Oh O OH 0

Step A Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 1302 Step A, except using the phenethylamine indicated (4.99 g), the product was obtained (5.96 g, 86%, MH+ = 210).

Step B The compound from Step A above (5.0 g) was added to 30 g of PPA at 150°C and the resulting mixture stirred for 20 min, before being poured on ice and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic phase was dried over MgS04, concentrated in vacuo and purified by silica gel chromatography (EtOAc: MeOH, 95: 5) to give the product (0.5 g, 9%).

Step C Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 13.3 Step D, except using the compound from Step B above (0.14 g), the product was obtained (0. 18 g, 87%, MH+ = 256).

Step D Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 11 Step B, except using the compound from Step C above (0.18 g), the product was obtained (0. 17 g).

Step E Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 13.3 Step B, except using the compound from Step D above (0.17 g), the product was obtained (0. 17 g, 95%, MH+ = 315).

Step F Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 13.29 Step C, except using the product from Step E above (0.17 g), the nitrophenol was obtained (0.165 g, 99%, MH+ = 303).

Step G Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 10.55 Step C, except using the product from Step F above (0.165 g), the title compound was obtained (0.128 g, 86%, MH+ = 193).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1306 Step A w OaN H OMe O OMe O Step B Step C H N r NH jw 02N) ? : OH O OH 0

Step A Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 11 Step B, except using the lactam (0.179 g), the title compound was obtained (0.25 g, 25%).

Step B Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 13.29 Step C, except using the product from Step A above (0.055 g), the phenol was obtained (0.045 g, 99%).

Step C Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 10.55 Step C, except using the product from Step B above (0.045 g), the title compound was obtained (0.022 g, 57%, MH+ = 179).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1307 Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 2, except using 3 (R)-hydroxypyrrolidine HCI (1.36 g), the title compound was obtained (2.25 g, 89%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1308

Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 2, except using morpholine, the title compound was obtained (3.79 g).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1309 Step A Step B I I-A--. ol N, 02 N02 NH2 0/0 0 0 0 0

Step A Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 13.29 Step B, except using the commercially available nitrophenylsulfonylchloride and diethylamine (2.2 eq), the dimethylsulfonamide was obtained (90%, MH+ = 231).

Step B Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 10.55 Step C, except using the product from Step B above, the title compound was obtained (45%, MH+ = 201).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1310

I + 0 1 0 1 1 N02 Me0 H Me0 N02 aza Step B Step MeotNlXNH2 I 2 0

Step A Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 13.29 Step B, except using the commercially available nitrobenzoylchloride and the commercially available amine indicated, the benzamide was obtained (13%, MH = 253).

Step B Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 10.55 Step C, except using the product from Step B above, the title compound was obtained (94%, MH = 223).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1310A I Step A I I Step N ci IN02+-IN, H 0,-IN0 N02 O O -Ira Step B XNH2 0 StepB o 0

Step A Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 13.29 Ster B, except using the commercially available nitrobenzoylchloride and dimethylamine, the benzamide could be obtained.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1311 0 0 0 0 0 Step A Ph _-- - I Me0 MeO HO NH Step A To a benzene (20 mL) solution of methoxythiophenesulfonylchloride (1.5 g) was added AICI3 (2.0 g) at RT. After 15 min, the mixture was added to 0.1 N HCI (aq) with stirring, then extracted with Et20. Washing the organic phase with bring, drying

over MgS04, concentration in vacuo and purification by silica gel chromatography (Hexane: EtOAc, 5: 2) gave the title compound (1.5 g, 84%).

Step B Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 13.29 Steps C-G, except using the product from Step A above, the title compound was obtained (3%, MH+ = 380).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1312 Br Br Step A CI \ I S Br Step B Br Step C , \P"x4 o o OH 0 0 OH 0 OH L Step A Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 1311 Step A, except using the commercially available sulfonylchloride, the diphenylsulfone was obtained (880 mg, 80%).

Step B Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 11 Step B, except using the product from Step A above, the title compound was obtained (0.90 g, 97%).

Step C Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 10.55 Step C, except using the product from Step B above (0.16 g), the title compound was obtained (0.106 g, 95%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1313 HO Step Step Step A2 I o OH o OH Step B Step C N NHZ N02 P'.. OH 0 oh 0 Step A Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 1311 Step A, except using the commercially available phenol (2 g), the nitroacid was obtained 13 mmol).

Step B Oxallyl chloride (3.5 mL) and two drops of DMF was added to the product from Step A above (-13 mmol) dissolved in dichloromethane (100 mL). After stirring at RT overnight, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo, diluted with dichloromethane (50 mL), cooled to 0°C. Dimethylamine in THF (20 mL of 2N) and TEA (8 mL) were added. After 3 hr of stirring, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo, aq NaOH (1 M) was added, and the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane. The pH of the aq layer was adjusted to pH = 2 using 6N HCI (aq), and extracted with dichloromethane.

The combiuned organic extracts were washed with brine, dried, concentrated in vacuo, and the product purified by silica gel chromatography (700 mL dichloromethane/20 mL MeOH/1 mL AcOH) to give the title compound (800 mg, 27% for two steps).

Step C Following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 10.55 Step C, except using the product from Step B above (780 mg), the title compound was obtained (0.46 g, 68%).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1313A

By following a similar procedure as that used in Preparative Example 1001, steps C, D, E and F, using the known 2-ethyl-6-methoxy-N, N-dimethyl-benzamide (WO 9105781,2. 1g), the amine was obtained (53%, 1. 1g, MH+ = 209.1).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES 1313B

Step A The benzamide (0.70g, 3. 125mmol) was dissolved in dry ether (10ml) under argon and cooled to-78C. t-butyl lithium (4.2mL, as 1.7M solution in pentane) was added. The mixture was stirred at-78C for 1.5hr. 2-lodopropane (7.8 mmol) was

added and the mixture warmed to room temperature and stirred for an additional 16 hrs. Water was added to quench, and the mixture was washed with water, then with 1 N HCI. The organic phase was dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated. Flash column chromatography (10: 1 Hexane-EtOAC) provided the t-butyl compound (33 mg, 4%, MH+ = 280.9).

Step B A solution of the compound 1004 (1.2 g, 3.23 mmol) in dichloromethane (50 mL) was cooled to-75 °C. 1 M BBr3 solution in dichloromethane (7.5 mL, 7.5 mmol) was added dropwise with stirring. The mixture was stirred at-75 °C for 2 h. The mixture was added to ice-water. After stirring at rt for 0.5 h, the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane. The organic was concentrated and the residue was purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane-methanol, 9: 1 v/v) to give the product 1005 as a yellow solid (1.05 g, 91%). m/e 357 (MH+),'H NMR (CDC13) 8 8.44 (s, 1 H), 3.12 (s, 3 H), 2.87 (s, 3 H).

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 1314 0 0 0 Step A H3 S Step B H3C0 // HO Br H3CO Br HsCO Br Step C Ste D , N. S \ Step E i, s p I 7/H3CO Br H3CO Br H3CO Br Step F 0 0 s Step G s Step H s Ph H CN-- '/H3C0 NHa a/HO NH2 Ph

Step A Methyl-4-bromo-3-hydroxy-2-thiophenecarboxylate (20g, 84.36 mmol) was dissolved in 400 mL of acetone. Potassium carbonate (58g, 420.3 mmol) was added followed by iodomethane (45 mL, 424 mmol). The resulting mixture was heated at reflux for 4.5 h. After cooling, the mixture was filtered through a thin Celite pad, rinsing with methylene chloride. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to give 22.5 g of methyl-4-bromo-3-methoxy-2-thiophenecarboxylate (crude, 100%, MH+ = 251.0) as a dark green solid.

Step B The product from Step A above (22. 5g, 84.36 mmol) was dissolved in 60 mL of tetrahydrofuran and added with 125 mL of a 1.0 M NaOH aqueous solution. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 d, then washed with ether (60 mL x 2), acidified to pH-2 using a 1.0 M HCI aqueous solution. Solids were precipitated out after acidification, and collected by filtration. The solid was dissolved in methylene chloride-ethyl acetate (-4 : 1, v/v). The organic solution was washed with H20 and brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to a light yellow solid, further dried on hight vacuum, yielding 17.95 g of 4-bromo-3-methoxy-2-thiophene carboxylic acid (90%, MH+=237. 0).

Step C The carboxylic acid (3.26 g, 13.75 mmol) available from Step B above was treated with 30 mL of concentrated sulfuric acid. The mixture was sealed in a one- neck round bottom flask, and heated at 65°C for 4.5 h. After cooled to room temperature, the mixture was poured into 200 mL of crushed ice, and extracted with methylene chloride (100 mL x 3). The organic extracts were combined, washed successively with H20 (50 mL x 2), sat. NaHC03 (50 mL x 3), and brine (50 mL). The organic solution was dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to a dark brown oil, which was purified by flash column chromatography (biotage, Si02 column) using hexanes-methylene chloride (3: 1, v/v) as eluent. Removal of solvents afforded 1.83 g of 3-bromo-4-methoxy thiophene (69%) as a light yellow oil.

Step D To a stirred solution of 3-bromo-4-methoxythiophene (550 mg, 2.85 mmol), prepared in Step C above, in 30 mL of methylene chloride at-78°C was added dropwise along the inside wall of the flask chlorosulfonic acid (0.48 mL, 7.21 mmol).

The mixture was stirred at-78°C for 10 min, continued at room temperature for 1 h, and filtered through a 1-in silica gel pad, rinsing with methylene chloride. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuuo to give 270 mg of 4-bromo-3-methoxy-2-thiophene sulfonylchloride (33%) as a light yellow oil.

Step E To a stirred solution of thiophene sulfonylchloride (270 mg, 0.926 mmol) prepared in Step D above in 15 mL of methylene chloride at room temperature was added triethylamine followed by N-methyl-tertbutylamine (0.25 mL, 2.094 mmol). After 20 h, the mixture was diluted with 50 mL of methylene chloride, and washed with H20 and brine. The organic solution was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to an oily residue, which was purified by preparative TLC (methylene chloride as eluent) to afford 73 mg of the titled bromo-sulfonamide (23%) as a near colorless oil.

Step F A one-neck round bottom flask was charged with bromo-sulfonamide (73 mg, 0.2133 mmol, from Step E above), palladium acetate (5 mg, 0.0223 mmol), binap (0.03212 mmol), cesium carbonate (139 mg, 0.4266 mmol), and benzophenonimine (0.06 mL, 0.358 mmol). The mixture was evacuated via house vacuum, and refilled with nitrogen. A 3 mL of anhydrous toluene was added. The mixture was evacuated again, refilled with nitrogen, and heated at reflux for 2.5 d. After cooled to room temperature, methylene chloride (50 mL) was added, the mixture was filtered through a Celite pad, rinsing with methylene chloride. The filtrated was concentrated in vacuo to give 205 mg ( rude, MH+ = 443.1) of the desired imine product as a dark brown oil, used in next step without purification.

Step G The imine from Step F above (205 mg, crude, 0.2133 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL of methanol, and added with sodium acetate (81 mg, 0.9873 mmol) followed by

hydroxylamine hydrochloride (68 mg, 0.98 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6.5 h, quenched with the addition of 10 mL of a 1.0 M NaOH aqueous solution. The aqueous mixture was extracted with methylene chloride (30 mL x 3).

The extracts were combined, washed with brine, dried by Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to a dark yellow oil, which was purified by preparative TLC (methylene chloride-methanol = 100: 1, v/v) to give 34 mg (57% over two steps, MH+ = 279.0) of methoxy-thiophenesulfonamide amine as a light yellow oil, solidified on standing.

Step H To a stirred suspension of sodium hydride (60%, 45 mg, 1.13 mmol) in 3 mL of anhydrous N, N'-dimethylformamide (DMF) was added dropwise ethanethiol (0.1 mL, 1.34 mmol). After 10 min, the mixture tured into a clear solution, and 1 mL of this solution was taken up in a syringe and added dropwise to a stirred solution of methoxy-thiophenesulfonamide amine in 1 mL of DMF. The mixture was heated up to 95°C, and continued for 3.5 h. After cooling, the mixture was poured into 20 mL of a 1.0 M NaOH aqueous solution. The aqueous mixture was washed with methylene chloride (30 mL x 3). The organic washings were combined, re-extracted with a 1.0 M NaOH aqueous solution (15 mL) and H20 (15 mL). The aqueous layer and aqueous extracts were combined, adjusted to pH-6 using a 1.0 M HCI aqueous solution, and extracted with methylene chloride (75 mL x 3). The organic extracts were washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated in vacuo to a dark yellow oil. This oil was dissolved in ethyl acetate (50 mL), washed with H20 (10 mL x 2) and brine (10 mL). The organic solution was dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated in vacuo to afford 36 mg (100%, MH+ = 265.0) of hydroxyl-thiophene sulfonamide amine as a yellow oil.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 1315 O. O S O. O S O. O S Ph h H3C0 g'I H3C0 Br'/H3C0 N-= Ph Step C zu . S S step D -7f Step D 9ksi '/H3C0 NHZ

Step A Following the procedures described in Preparative Example 1314 Step E, 4- bromo-3-methoxy-2-thiophene-sulfonyl chloride (190 mg, 0.65 mmol, available from Step D, Preparative Example 1314) was converted to the titled tert-butyl sulfonamide (56 mg, 26%, MH+ = 328.1) upon treatment of triethylamine (0.28 mL, 2.0 mmol) and tert-butylamine (0.15 mL, 1.43 mmol) in 10 mL of methylene chloride.

Step B tert-Butyl sulfonamide (98 mg, 0.3 mmol) available from Step A above was converted to the imine product (296 mg, crude, MH+ = 429.1) by using the procedure described in Step F of Preparative Example 1314.

Step C The imine product (296 mg, crude,-0. 3 mmol) was transformed to the desired thiophene-amine (23 mg, 30% over two steps, MH+ = 265.0) by using the procedure described in Step G of Preparative Example 1314.

Step D If one were to apply the procedure set forth in Step H of Preparative Example 1314, but using the thiophene amine available from Step C above, one would obtain the titled hydroxyl thiophene sulfonamide amine.

PREPARATIVE EXPAMPLE 1316 CI' N' -Ph Step B N -Ph Me MeO N= (MeO N=< Ph Ph Step C Step ah O ; O S _ G Ph Ph Ph

Step A Following the procedures set forth in Preparative example 13.29 Step B through F, but using diethylamine, 3-methoxy-2-thiophenesulfonyl chloride (available from Step A, Preparative example 13.29) was converted to titled diethylsulfonamido thiophene imine (MH+ = 429.1) Step B Thiophene-imine (1.5 g, 3.5 mmol), available from Step A above, was dissolved in 30 mL of CH2CI2, and added with potassium carbonate (1. 2 g, 8.70 mmol) followed by drop wise addition of bromine (0.32 mL, 6.25 mmol). After stirred for 2 d, H20 was added. The two layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (50 mL x 2). The organic layers were combined, washed with a 10% Na2S203 aqueous solution (40 mL x 2) and brine (40 mL), dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to a dark brown oil. This oil was separated by preparative TLC (CH2CI2 as eluent), to give 0.96 g (54%) of the desired bromo-imine as a bright yellow oil (M+ = 507, M + 2 = 509) Step C Bromo-imine (0.95g, 1.87 mmol), available from Step B above, was dissolved in 15 mL of anhydrous THF, cooled in a-78°C bath, and treated with a 2.5 M solution of n-butyl lithium in hexanes (1.2 mL, 3.0 mmol) drop wise along the side wall of the flask. After 30 min, lodomethane (0.35 mL, 5.62 mmol) was added drop wise.

Reaction was continued for 5 h, during which time the cooling bath was allowed to warm slowly to 0°C. The mixture was quenched by H20 (25 mL), and extracted with CH2CI2 (50 mL x 2). The organic extracts were washed with brine, dried with Na2SO4, and concentrated in vacuo to give 0.93 g (crude, > 100%) of the desired methylated imine as a dark yellow oil (MH+ = 443. 1) Step D The crude methyl-imine (0.93 g), prepared in step C above, was converted to the methyl-hydroxyl-amine (0.21 g, 41 %, MH+ = 265.0) by using the procedures described in Step G of Preparative Example 13.29.

PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 1316A S S O Mt c'- ! j c n H3CO Br H3C0 Br step C Step C step HO NH' Ph ß HO NH2 1/H3CO NH2 V/H3CO Nt Ph Step A Following the procedures described in Preparative Example 1314 Step E, but using cyclopropyl amine, the titled cyclopropyl-sulfonamide was prepared from 4- bromo-3-methoxy-2-thiophene-sulfonylchloride (available from Step D, Preparative Example 1314).

Step B Cyclopropyl-sulfonamide, available from Step A above, was treated with potassium carbonate and iodomethane in reflux acetone to afford N-methyl-N- cyclopropyl sulfonamide.

Step C, D, E Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 1314, steps F to H, N-methyl-N-cyclopropyl sulfonamide from Step B above was converted to the hydroxyl-amino-thiophene sulfonamide (MH+ = 249.0) PREPARATIVE EXAMPLE 1317-1318 Following the procedures set forth in Preparative Example 1314 but using the commercially available amines, the hydroxyaminothiophene products listed in the Table below could be prepared. Prep. Ex. Amine Product 1317 Nu s NAP- HO NHs HO 1318 nu p\S \ NH2 N OH N- S tN N EXAMPLE 1 V s° u \ ? "''/ Et0 S\N + HN EtOH, Huni's Base Et0 SN NH pTSA I NH OH Nô NEO Oh \ oh \N O \ O

To a stirred solution of the isothiazoledioxide from Preparative Example 200 (30mg, 0. 078mmol) and the p-toluene sulfonate salt of the amine from Preparative Example 75.1 (25mg, 0. 086mmol ; Note: pTSA salt prepared by combining 1 eq of pTSA and 1 eq of the amine from Prep. Ex. 75.1 according to standard procedures) in ethanol (1 mL) was added diisopropyl ethyl amine (0.02mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for four hours at room temperature, solvents were removed under reduced pressure and purification by preparative silica gel TLC afforded the isothiazoledioxide ester product (26.9mg, 68%, MH+ = 504. 8).

EXAMPLE 2 0 0 0 0 EtO N + H2N 1. ETOH, Hunig's Base \SN . pTSA 0 \ ' 2. 2N NAOH, 600C OH Zou OH OH To a stirred solution of isothiazoledioxide from Preparative Example 200 (30mg, 0. 078mmol) and the p-toluene sulfonate salt of the amine from Preparative Example 75.1 (25mg, 0. 086mmol ; Note: pTSA salt prepared by combining 1 eq of pTSA and 1 eq of the amine from Prep. Ex. 75.1 according to standard procedures) in ethanol (1 mL) was added diisopropyl ethyl amine (0.02mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for four hours at room temperature; solvents were removed under reduced pressure and stored under vacuum for one hour. The residue was treated with 1 N

NaOH at room temperature and the solution is heated at 60 C for two hours. The reaction mixture was neutralized with 2N HCI (1 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3x 10mL). The combined organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, evaporation and purification by preparative silical gel TLC (5% MeOH : CH2CI2) gave the isothiazoledioxide product (7mg, 8%, MH+ = 432.9).

EXAMPLE 3

To a stirred solution of the isothiazoledioxide intermediate from Preparative Example 201 (0.2 mmol) and the amine from Preparative Example 3 (32 mg, 0.2 mmol) in ethanol (2mL) was added diisopropyl ethyl amine (0.02 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature, solvents were removed under reduced pressure and purification by preparative silica gel TLC afforded the isothiazoledioxide ester product (4.7 mg, 5%, MH+ = 500.9).

EXAMPLE 4

If one were to heat the product of Example 3 in a hydroxide solution at >100°C in a sealed tube for several hours, followed by subsequent acidification (2N HCI) of the mixture cooled to room temperature, the isothiazoledioxide product indicated could be obtained.

EXAMPLE 5

Following a similar procedure as that described in Example 1, except using the amine from Preparative Example 75.61, the isothiazoledioxide ester product was obtained (43.5 mg, 50%, MH+ = 532.7).

EXAMPLE 6 The product from Example 5 (40mg, 0. 075mmol) was treated with 1 N NaOH and stirred and heated at 60 C for three hours. The reaction mixture was neutralized with 2N HCI (1 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3x 10mL). The combined organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, evaporation and purification by preparative silical gel TLC (CH2CI2) gave the isothiazoledioxide product (7. 5 mg, 22%, MH+ = 460.8).

EXAMPLES 100-119, 121-124, 129 and 130 If one were to follow a procedure similar to that set forth in Examples 5 and 6, but using the amines and the isothiazoledioxide intermediates from the Preparative Examples indicated in the Table below, the isothiazoledioxide products could be obtained. Ex. Prep Ex Prep Ex Product of (Amine) isothiazote- dioxide intermediate 100 300 75. 9 po ZON N N N N - HH H O O 10130075. 44 po ZON /\ ;, _ N N oh H O 10230075 J 9. o ZON N N4 OH/O OH H H O O

EXAMPLES 131-150. 152-155. 160 and 161 If one were to follow a procedure similar to that set forth in Examples 3 and 4, but using the amines and the isothiazoledioxide intermediates from the Preparative Examples indicated in the Table below, the isothiazoledioxide products could be obtained. Ex. Prep Ex Prep Ex Product of (Amine) isothiazole- dioxide intermediate 131 307 3 0- ;-o Nez M.- N N -po N OH O 132 308 3 0 N'\Z- N N N OH 0 zozo 0 Neo PO N4 oh N O NY H H yc - OH <

EXAMPLES 162-181, 183-186, 191-213. 214-217, 222-263 Following a procedure similar to that set forth in Example 5, but using the amine and the isothiazoledioxide intermediate from the Preparative Example indicated in the Table below, the isothiazoledioxide product of Example 162 was obtained.

If one were to follow a procedure similar to that set forth in Example 5, but using the amines and the isothiazoledioxide intermediates from the Preparative Examples indicated in the Table below, the isothiazoledioxide products of Examples 163-181, 183-186, 191-213,214-217, 222-263 could be obtained. Ex. Prep Ex Prep Ex Product of (Amine) isothiazole- dioxide intermediate 162 300 75. 9 po Etc N N 0 0 N oh oh H O 163 300 75. 44 po Etc \ - , \/-N N-\ N N' zozo O 164 300 75. 1 po 1643007M Et02C N EtO2C0N N N - O O

Examples of disease-modifying antirheumatic drugs include, for example, methotrexate, sulfasalzine, leflunomide, TNFa directed agents (e. g., infliximab, etanercept, and adalimumab), IL-1 directed agents (e. g. , anakinra) B cell directed agents (e. g. , rituximab), T cell directed agents (e. g., alefacept, efalizumab, and CTLA4-1g), TNFa-converting enzyme inhibitors, interleukin-1 converting enzyme inhibitors, and p38 kinase inhibitors.

The term"other classes of compounds indicated for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis", as used herein, unless indicated otherwise, means: compounds selected from the group consisting of: IL-1 directed agents (e. g. , anakinra); B cell directed agents (e. g. , rituximab); T cell directed agents (e. g., alefacept, efalizumab, and CTLA4-1g), TNFa-converting enzyme inhibitors, interleukin-1 converting enzyme inhibitors, and p38 kinase inhibitors.

Angina is a CXCR2 mediated disease treatable with the CXCR2 antagonist compounds of this invention. Thus, another embodiment of this invention is directed to a method of treating angina in a patient in need of such treatment comprising administering to said patient a therapeutical effective amount of a compound (a CXCR2 antagonist compound) of formula IA.

While the present invention has been described in conjunction with specific embodiments set forth above, many alternatives, modifications and variations thereof will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art. All such alternatives, modifications and variations are intended to fall within the spirit and scope of the present invention.